diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-0.txt | 5379 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-0.zip | bin | 76986 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-h.zip | bin | 300482 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-h/50654-h.htm | 6398 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 94276 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-h/images/i_001a.jpg | bin | 55877 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-h/images/i_069.jpg | bin | 44418 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/50654-h/images/i_069a.jpg | bin | 29417 -> 0 bytes |
11 files changed, 17 insertions, 11777 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0336b10 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #50654 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/50654) diff --git a/old/50654-0.txt b/old/50654-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 918f069..0000000 --- a/old/50654-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5379 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook, In the Wonderful Land of Hez, by Cornelius -Shea - - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - - -Title: In the Wonderful Land of Hez - or, The Mystery of the Fountain of Youth - - -Author: Cornelius Shea - - - -Release Date: December 9, 2015 [eBook #50654] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - - -***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE WONDERFUL LAND OF HEZ*** - - -E-text prepared by Craig Kirkwood, Demian Katz, and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) from page images generously made -available by Villanova University Digital Library -(http://digital.library.villanova.edu) - - - -Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this - file which includes the original illustrations. - See 50654-h.htm or 50654-h.zip: - (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/50654/50654-h/50654-h.htm) - or - (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/50654/50654-h.zip) - - - Images of the original pages are available through - the Villanova University Digital Library. See - http://digital.library.villanova.edu/Item/vudl:293263 - - -Transcriber’s note: - - Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_). - - An additional transcriber’s notes is at the end. - - - - - -[Illustration: Something snapped above them, and down came the girl, -bringing the skeleton with her, knocking the daring boy flat upon his -back.] - - * * * * * - -BRAVE & BOLD - -_A Different Complete Story Every Week_ - -_Issued Weekly. By Subscription $2.50 per year. Entered according to -Act of Congress in the year 1905, in the Office of the Librarian of -Congress, Washington, D. C., by_ STREET & SMITH, _79-89 Seventh Avenue, -New York, N. Y._ - -No. 127. NEW YORK, May 27, 1905. Price Five Cents. - - * * * * * - - -IN THE WONDERFUL LAND OF HEZ; OR, The Mystery of the Fountain of Youth. - -By the author of “The Wreck of the ‘Glaucus.’” - - - - -CHAPTER I. AN ECCENTRIC COUPLE. - - -One fine October afternoon, in the year 1880, a sailboat might have -been seen gliding serenely over the waters of Lake Okechobee, in the -southern part of Florida. - -The boat had but two occupants, and these were so different in -appearance that a little description of them will not be out of order. - -The elder of the two was attired in a very loose-fitting suit of blue -flannel, and wore a Panama hat. - -He was probably fifty years of age, and one look at his round, -smooth-shaven face would have told the casual observer that he was a -good-hearted individual. - -His eyes were hidden by a pair of blue goggles of extraordinary -proportions, which made the man look as though he had donned a diver’s -helmet. - -In stature this remarkable personage was short and very stout. - -Prof. Remington Easy was his name, and now, as he has been introduced, -we will turn our attention to his companion--a tall, lanky individual, -attired in corduroy knee breeches, heavy top-boots, red flannel shirt, -linen coat and a broad-brimmed hat--a typical Yankee, for all the world. - -This was Martin Haypole, the professor’s right-hand man. - -The Yankee was not over thirty years of age, and had it not been for -the thin bunch of yellow hair he wore on his chin, he would have been a -fair-looking man. - -Martin was about six feet two inches in height, and weighed probably -one hundred and thirty-five pounds; thus it will be seen that he -possessed not an ounce of superfluous flesh. - -He had often remarked that what he lacked the professor amply made up -for, and vice versa. - -But what are these two curious individuals doing in this wild part of -Florida? the reader may ask. - -The question is answered in a very few words. - -Prof. Remington Easy was of an exploring turn of mind. - -About a month before the opening of our story he became deeply -interested in that vast, unexplored region in the southern part of -Florida known as the Everglades. - -The more he studied over the matter the more he became desirous of -penetrating the heart of the swamp and discovering something wonderful. - -The professor possessed an unlimited supply of cash, and he spared no -expense in fitting himself out for his trip. - -Thus we now find them in their boat upon the lower part of Lake -Okechobee, within about five miles of the beginning of the Everglades. - -The sun was yet about three hours high, and the professor hoped to -reach a good place to land before the shades of night gathered around -them. - -It was now the second day since they had entered the upper portion of -the lake, by way of the stream beyond it, and the professor judged that -the marshes must be close at hand. - -Owing to the fact that their boat did not possess one of those useful -things known as a centerboard, and that the winds had been contrary -ever since they entered Lake Okechobee, they had made but a scant -twenty miles in nearly two days. - -While Prof. Easy was satisfied with this slow mode of progress, Martin -Haypole was not. - -The boat, which was christened _Maid of the Marsh_, appeared to be a -very insignificant thing in the eyes of the Yankee. - -He had laughed at it, swore at it and nearly cried over it. - -And now, just as Prof. Easy made a prodigious effort and rose to his -feet, he began again. - -“I tell you, professor, this is the dod-rottedest boat that ever sot -in water. Them trees there to the south’ard are ther Everglades; but -d’yer think we’ll ever git thar at this rate? Mought better started in -a rowboat. _Maid of ther Marsh!_ A cussed fine name, ain’t it? I hope -she gits stuck in some marsh afore long, an’ never gits out again. But -I’m ’fraid we’ll both be gray-headed afore she gits to a marsh. Twenty -miles in two days! Well, I swan ter Guinea! If that ain’t travelin’ in -ther nineteenth century, I’m a downright fule!” - -“Tut, tut, Martin,” replied the professor; “take things easy. I took -notice that you were very glad to get in the boat day before yesterday, -when that big alligator gave chase after you.” - -“Oh! she were good enough then, professor. I don’t want a ’gator nosin’ -aroun’ me; an’ this tub is good enough when that kind of work is goin’ -on. But when you come right down ter sailin’, whar in blazes does this -dod-rotted thing come in?” - -“Have patience, Martin. We will reach those trees yonder in less than -an hour. See! a favorable breeze is even now springing up.” - -The professor was right. For the first time during their voyage upon -the lake the wind was blowing in a direction suited to their course. - -The hitherto flapping mainsail now bellied out, and the little craft -went skipping through the water like a thing of life. - -Even Martin Haypole was temporarily satisfied, and with his hand upon -the tiller he watched the rapidly nearing forest in the swamp district. - -The breeze kept up, and, sure enough, in a little while they arrived at -the end of the lake proper. - -As soon as they got among the trees, the breeze ceased to exist, and -once more the sail flapped idly about the mast. - -“I’ll be gosh-dinged if we won’t eat supper on land to-night, anyhow!” -exclaimed the Yankee, as he pushed the boat, by means of a long pole, -into a narrow creek, and made for a little island that was several feet -above the level of the marsh. - -“Good enough, Martin--good enough!” returned his companion, rubbing his -hands. “I am agreeable, I assure you.” - -At that moment the prow of the boat struck the bank and caused the fat -professor to lose his balance and tumble overboard. - -“Ha! ha! ha!” laughed the Yankee, as he observed his employer -floundering about in the muddy water. “How d’ye like it, professor? You -laughed at me when I fell overboard--now it is your turn, by gosh! I -told you laughin’ was catchin’. Now, if one of them ugly ’gators was -ter come along there would be fun. Thunder and lightnin’! if there -ain’t one, now, I’m a rank sinner!” - -A floundering was heard a few feet from the struggling professor, and a -half-grown alligator was seen making for him with all his might. - -The luckless man had now assumed an upright position, with the dirty, -black water even with his chin, and as he observed his peril he -bellowed lustily for help. - -He strove in vain to reach the gunwale of the boat, but the distance -was too far for his short arms. - -Haypole, with an amused smile upon his face, allowed the alligator -to get within a few feet of his intended prey, and then reached over -suddenly and seized his employer by the arms. - -He then saw that he would not be able to get him out as quickly as he -had anticipated, and his gleeful look turned to one of alarm. - -The professor was a heavyweight of the first water, and had it not -been for the fact that Haypole was a very strong man, the ferocious -alligator would certainly have had a good supper that night. - -But by an almost superhuman effort he jerked him from the muddy water -just as the ferocious monster made a vicious snap with its huge jaws. - -“Murder!” yelled the professor, as he fell in a heap at the feet of the -Yankee; “the thing has bitten off my foot!” - -“I guess not, professor; he only nipped off ther heel of yer shoe. -Great haystacks! but that was a narrar escape, though! I didn’t know -you was so ’tarnal heavy.” - -As soon as the half-drowned man found that he was not injured, he got -mad, and shaking his fist under Haypole’s nose, said: - -“Martin, if you ever let such a thing as that occur again, I’ll -discharge you on the spot!” - -“Now, don’t git mad, old man; you won’t discharge me, you know you -won’t. Why, thunderation! You couldn’t git along without me.” - -“It makes no difference; the whole thing was your fault. If you had not -made such an ass of yourself by pushing the boat so hard against the -bank, I would not have fallen overboard at all. Then the idea of your -standing here laughing at me when the alligator was coming after me -with all his might. You think you are very funny, Martin Haypole; and -I’ll tell you what I have a great notion of doing.” - -“What?” asked the Yankee, showing just a slight tinge of passion. - -“I have a great mind of thrashing you.” - -“You had better not try it, professor. I never seen that man yet as -could do that in a square rough and tumble.” - -Whack! - -The enraged professor struck his employee a smart blow on the face with -his open hand. - -“Thunder and lightning!” howled the Yankee; “I can’t stand that, even -if you do be my boss.” - -He made a sudden dive forward and seized Prof. Remington Easy by the -collar, and prepared to stand him on his head. - -But the fat man was still mad, and he ducked down and seized his -opponent by his long legs. - -Then each strove to force the other to the bottom of the boat. - -“Drat your tarnal hide! I’ll wallop you, anyhow, now,” exclaimed -Haypole. - -He let out his full strength, and down went the fat professor, with him -on top. - -But as they struck the boat gave a lurch, and overboard went both of -them. - -And the alligator, who was still hovering about the place, opened -wide his jaws and swam toward the two struggling forms, who were each -striving to see who could shout “Murder!” the loudest. - - - - -CHAPTER II. AN ACCEPTED PROPOSITION. - - -“Dick this is a pretty wild spot, isn’t it?” - -“Well, I should say so, Leo; and not only wild, but dangerous, as well.” - -“Dangerous? Why, you are not afraid of the ’gators, are you?” - -“Not exactly; but then there are other things besides alligators to -look out for in this region.” - -The two speakers were young men, eighteen or nineteen years of age. - -They were seated upon the trunk of a fallen tree, on a small island, -situated at the lower end of Lake Okechobee, Florida. - -A few feet from them a negro lad was busily engaged in cooking a haunch -of meat over a brightly burning fire. - -The first speaker was Leo Malvern, the son of a wealthy St. Augustine -merchant, and his companion was his cousin, Dick Vincey, of New York -City. - -Dick had come to the South to spend the fall and winter with his -relatives, and his cousin had proposed that the two should make a trip -as far as the Everglades. - -Both liked adventure, and the idea of penetrating into that unexplored -region pleased them to a great extent. - -They procured all necessary supplies needful for such an undertaking, -and set out for their destination, after traveling as far as they could -by rail. - -The young negro who was engaged in preparing their evening meal--for it -was near sunset--was a comical-looking personage, to say the least. - -He was not as black as some of his race, but the spread of his nose and -mouth, and the habitual grin on his face gave him a decidedly humorous -appearance. - -He had lived at the home of Leo Malvern’s folks since his earliest -infancy, and was a faithful servant. - -This interesting young coon, who is to figure as one of the characters -in our story, was known as Lucky. - -He never knew any other name, and, consequently, was satisfied. - -Like the majority of his people, he loved a banjo, and had brought -one along on the trip for the amusement of himself and his two young -masters, as he chose to call the boys. - -“Is supper ready?” asked Dick, as he noticed that the darky was looking -at them. - -“Yes, sah; it am all done. Ready for ter dive in, you bet,” was the -reply, accompanied by a broad grin. - -“All right,” said Leo Malvern; “we may as well eat, then.” - -The two boys now made their way to the white cloth spread upon the -ground, and prepared to do justice to the tempting meal before them. - -The odor of coffee and roasted possum made them hungry, although their -appetites were not lacking, by any means. - -But just as they were about to attack the tempting morsels, the sounds -of an angry discussion were heard in the near vicinity. - -Leo and Dick sprang to their feet at a bound and seized their rifles. - -Their canoe was but a few feet distant, and it was but the work of a -minute to spring into it and push off in the direction the sounds came -from. - -Up to this moment they had judged they were the only human beings in -this out-of-the-way place. - -But now it seemed that they were not. The voices were those of two -men in a dispute, and the boys determined to catch a glimpse of their -owners. - -Dick paddled with all his might, while Leo held his rifle ready for -instant use, in case those they heard might be enemies. - -Rounding a bend, they suddenly came in sight of a small sailboat and -two struggling men. - -It was the _Maid of the Marsh_, and the two men were Prof. Remington -Easy and the Yankee. - -While the canoe containing the boys was yet a hundred feet away from -the boat, the two men suddenly fell overboard. - -Then it was that they first observed the alligator making for them. - -As the professor and Martin Haypole arose to the surface and began -shouting lustily for help, Leo raised his rifle to his shoulder. - -Crack! - -As the report rang out the hungry alligator ceased his forward progress -and began floundering about in the muddy water. - -The bullet had pierced his right eye, and in less than half a minute it -expired. - -Meanwhile the Yankee succeeded in grasping the gunwale of the _Maid of -the Marsh_, and at length drew himself safely on board. - -Then he hastily lifted his employer from the water, after which he -gazed pantingly in the direction of the approaching canoe. - -“Much obliged to yer, boys,” said he, addressing our two young friends. -“Whichever of ye it was that plugged that ugly critter are a good shot, -swan if he ain’t!” - -Leo and Dick at once perceived that the men were not likely to prove -enemies, so they lost no time in urging their canoe to the side of the -sailboat. - -“Glad to meet you, young gentlemen!” exclaimed the professor, rubbing -his hands. “I thought us two were the only ones in this wild place. I -am glad that such is not the case, though, I assure you. For had it not -been for you, both Haypole and myself would surely have been devoured -by that ferocious monster. All on account of his pig-headedness, too.” - -“Now, see here, professor,” put in the Yankee, “I ain’t a-goin’ ter -quarrel with you ag’in under no consideration. This oughter be a lesson -for us both. Why, I swan ter Guinea! that little foolishness nearly -cost us both our nat’ral lives! Come aboard, boys; I’ve got some fine, -old Medford rum here, an’ gosh! if I don’t stand treat.” - -The smell of the blood from the dead alligator was drawing others to -the spot, and both Leo and Dick deemed it advisable to board the boat. - -They at once clambered over the gunwale of the _Maid of the Marsh_, -and then, tying their canoe to the stern, questioned the professor and -Haypole as to where they had come from, and what they were doing there. - -In a very matter-of-fact way Prof. Easy related his whole story, word -for word, and in conclusion said: - -“Now, then, young gentlemen, tell us how we came to find you in this -dangerous and unhealthy place.” - -It did not take Dick Vincey long to do this, and when he had finished -all four seemed glad that the meeting had taken place. - -“Leo Malvern and Dick Vincey, eh?” said Prof. Easy. “Well, I’ll tell -you both bluntly that I like you. I am now going to make a proposition -to you, which you can accept or decline as you see fit.” - -“What is it?” asked Leo. - -“I would like to have you accompany me on my exploring trip. You are -both made of the right sort of material for such an undertaking; and, -if my theory proves correct, you will assist me in making one of the -greatest discoveries the world has ever known.” - -“Before we give you an answer I would suggest that you move your boat -over to our island, just beyond the bend. We have a darky there who has -supper waiting for us, and we are both hungry. Besides, we have a fire -burning there, and it is getting dark. I think it will be pleasanter -for all hands,” observed Leo. - -“A good idee,” said Haypole. “Here, boys, is ther Medford rum I spoke -about; have some?” - -His offer was declined, greatly to his astonishment. - -“Great haystacks!” he exclaimed, swallowing a big mouthful of the -liquor; “this stuff won’t hurt ye any more’n apple cider.” - -The longer Leo and Dick remained in the company of the two men, the -better they liked them. - -There was something about Prof. Easy that was bound to make him friends -wherever he went, and Martin Haypole--well, he was one of those -comical, unsophisticated people whom almost everybody likes. - -Dick grasped a pole and assisted to shove the boat out into the stream, -and thence to the little island, where Lucky, the darky, was anxiously -awaiting the return of the two boys. - -When he saw the sailboat approaching through the gathering darkness, -he uttered a cry of alarm and hastily seized his rifle, which stood -against a tree. - -“Hold on, Lucky! it is all right,” shouted Leo. - -“Fo’ de Lor’ sakes! Whar did youse done git de boat, Massa Leo?” asked -the darky. - -“We found her out here with two men in her,” returned Dick, as the prow -of the craft struck the little island. - -A line was thrown out, which Lucky quickly tied to a tree, and then the -four sprang out upon the ground. - -The darky still had the possum and coffee warm, and, as there was -enough to go around, all hands did ample justice to the meal. - -When supper was finished, Leo and Dick thought over the professor’s -proposition, and, after a while, concluded to accept it. - -The five sat about the fire for a long while, chatting over the -matter, and finally, when they began to get drowsy, Leo suggested that -they should turn in upon the bottom of the boat, leaving one man on -guard for the first part of the night, and when his time was up, to -make a change. - -“I think it advisable to do this,” said he, “for we can’t tell what -might happen while we slept.” - -“A good idea,” promptly returned the professor. “Martin will take the -first watch.” - -“I will, sartin,” said the Yankee. - -“And I’ll take second,” put in Dick. “To-morrow night some one else can -have a show.” - -This seemed to be satisfactory, so all turned in save Haypole, who, -rifle in hand, sat down upon the ground near the boat, with his back to -a tree. - -He kept the fire burning brightly to keep prowling animals away, and -listened to the regular breathing of his companions, who were soon fast -asleep. - -The hours flitted by. - -Martin Haypole’s time was nearly up, and he was still seated in the -position he had taken on commencing his watch. - -Up to this time he had remained wide awake, but now he began dozing. - -Suddenly he was brought to his full senses by hearing the crackling of -a twig at his elbow. - -The Yankee glanced hastily up, and was surprised to see the figure of a -man within two feet of him. - -Before he could make a move the stranger seized the rifle from his -hands, and bounded from the spot with the speed of an antelope. - -“Hey!” exclaimed Haypole, springing to his feet and firing his revolver -at the retreating form. “Who in thunderation be you, anyhow?” - -But a splash told him that the man had taken to the water. - - - - -CHAPTER III. THE STONE CUBE AND THE OBELISK. - - -Three weeks later we find Prof. Remington Easy and his exploring party -in the very heart of the great Everglades. - -Had they not been possessed of a vast amount of pluck and endurance -they would never have reached this far. - -But to turn back was strictly out of the question to them, and this, -coupled with the fact that they were completely fitted out for such an -undertaking, was the secret of their success. - -As Prof. Easy had expected, they found the central position of the -swamp less dangerous to traverse. It seemed to be upon higher and -more solid ground, and there was less water, and, consequently, less -alligators to look out for. - -It is a beautiful morning upon which we find them camped in a very -picturesque spot. - -The air seems purer than at any time since they entered the recesses of -the unexplored region, and all appear happy and contented. - -The stranger and his dog have not been seen during all this time, nor -has any other human being, outside of their own party. - -Each one of the swamp explorers has lost more or less flesh, though it -cannot be said that Martin Haypole’s loss, in that respect, amounts to -much. - -Though a native of the Southern clime, Lucky has suffered the most. - -He is worn down to a mere shadow, and had it not been for the -professor’s store of medicines he would certainly have found a grave in -the swamp. - -As it is, he has just about pulled through by the “skin of his teeth,” -as the saying goes. - -Leo Malvern has just shot a swamp deer, and they are busily engaged in -preparing some of the meat for their breakfast. - -“Well, professor,” said the young fellow, looking up from his task, “I -can’t say that we have made any great discovery yet, and I guess we are -pretty near the heart of the Everglades.” - -“I haven’t given up yet,” was the reply. “Here, examine this and tell -me what you think of it.” - -He produced a block of stone about two or three inches square from his -pocket as he spoke. - -Leo laid down the knife with which he was skinning the animal he had -slain, and took the object in question in his hand. - -“I found that lying upon the ground a few minutes ago,” went on the -professor. “Have any of you lost it?” - -He was promptly answered in the negative by all hands. - -“Nature certainly never formed that,” said Leo. “Ah! there are marks -upon it!” - -The boy was right. Upon one side of the stone were several cuts, -resembling, for all the world, Chinese hieroglyphics. - -“That’s very strange,” remarked Dick. - -“We are on the eve of a great discovery--mark my words, gentlemen,” -said the professor, in a manner of excitement. - -“I don’t see why,” ventured the Yankee. - -“You don’t? How do you suppose this thing came here, then?” - -“Somebody has been here afore, most likely.” - -“That’s it, exactly; somebody has been here before, and those who have -must certainly live in this neighborhood. Let us look about and see if -we can find anything more.” - -“Humph!” retorted Haypole; “suppose we do find something. What’ll it -amount to, anyhow?” - -No one vouchsafed a reply, and leaving Lucky to get the morning meal -ready, Leo, Dick and the professor began carefully searching about the -ground. - -At length the Yankee became interested, and joined them. - -But they looked about the spot where the professor had found the little -cube for full half an hour, and not another thing could they find that -seemed out of the way in the place. - -“Well,” observed Dick, as they were called to breakfast, “I would keep -the cube, professor, if I were you, and be very careful not to lose it.” - -“Oh! you may rest assured that I will,” was the reply. - -After the remains of the breakfast were cleared away, Leo arose to his -feet and signified his intention of climbing a tree to see how the land -lay. - -Selecting a good, tall one, which was at the same time easy to climb, -he went up. - -The tree was nearly a hundred feet high, and the boy did not pause -until he reached the top. - -Then he prepared to take in the surrounding country. - -The sun, which seldom found its way to the ground in the swamp, was -shining brightly all around him, and Leo felt his spirits rise as if by -magic. - -“This is fine,” he muttered to himself; “but I can’t see much besides -tree tops and cane brakes, after all. But it is worth ten dollars to -have the sun shine on you five minutes like this. Ah, by George!” - -He had just turned his gaze in a southerly direction as the words left -his lips. - -No wonder he uttered the exclamation. - -Leo Malvern was looking upon something besides trees, cane brakes and -pools of muddy water now. - -About a mile from the tree in which he was perched he plainly saw a -stone obelisk, which looked to be in the neighborhood of forty feet -high. - -Now, Leo knew this could not have grown there; so, locating the exact -direction, he began descending the tree to notify his companions of the -important discovery he had made. - -“Hurrah!” he shouted, when he reached the ground. “I’ve made the -greatest discovery yet!” - -“What is it?” exclaimed the professor, excitedly. - -“There is a stone pillar, or something, about a mile south of us.” - -“What!” - -“Exactly what I say. Come on; we will go to it.” - -Even Haypole became very much excited, and he hurried along after Leo -as fast as any of his companions. - -“I shan’t be astonished at anything we may find,” said Prof. Easy. -“Hundreds of years ago it was supposed that a fountain of youth existed -somewhere in these parts; and if that does not, I am sure something -else equally as wonderful does.” - -They had probably made half the distance to the obelisk, when the -baying of a dog suddenly came to their ears. - -“What in thunderation is that?” exclaimed the Yankee. - -“It is a dog, if I am not mistaken,” replied Leo. “Be cautious, all -hands, there is no use in our running headlong into danger.” - -With their weapons ready for instant use, they hurried cautiously ahead -through the tangled mazes of the swamp. - -They did not hear the dog bark again, though they listened attentively -for it. - -In a few minutes they came in sight of the obelisk that had attracted -Leo’s attention from the top of the tree. - -It seemed to be very ancient in appearance, for in many places pieces -were chipped from it. - -Yet it stood as erect as it had when placed there. - -A tangled mass of vines clung to it, half hiding the lower part of it. - -After peering carefully about, to make sure that there was no one -around, our friends advanced toward the huge monument of stone. - -It was a difficult matter to reach its base, for so dense was the -undergrowth that the Yankee had to unsling the ax from his back and cut -their way through. - -At frequent intervals they came to a halt and listened, but not the -least sound could they hear, save the noise they made themselves. - -“It is rather queer where that dog went to,” said Dick. - -“That’s so,” replied his cousin, shaking his head. - -“Somethin’ funny’ll happen putty soon--see if it don’t,” put in -Haypole. “I wouldn’t be much surprised to see ther ‘old boy’ jump -outer that big gravestone, an’ put for us. I’ll be ding-wizzened! if I -don’t begin ter feel squeamish.” - -“Come; let us force our way through these vines and get at the base of -the obelisk,” spoke up the professor, pushing his way forward. - -A few minutes later all five stood at the foot of the immense shaft, -panting and sweating from their exertions. - -As they tore the vines aside, they saw it was covered, at regular -intervals, with square bits of stone, exactly like the one found by -Prof. Easy. - -“Ah!” exclaimed the learned man, as he saw this; “this cube I found -evidently came from here. Let us see if we can find where it belongs.” - -Leo and Dick quickly produced their knives and began cutting away the -vines, while the professor put on his glasses, preparatory to making -the examination. - -They cleared away all around the base, which was about eighteen feet -square, and just as they finished, Dick’s eye lit upon one of the -places where a cube was missing. - -“Here is the spot,” said he. “Now, professor, let’s see if the one you -have fits here.” - -The professor stepped forward and produced the cube from his pocket. - -He was just about to place it in the opening when a rifle shot rang out -close at hand, followed by the baying of a dog. - -This so startled the man of science that he made an involuntary move -forward, thrusting the cube, as he did so, squarely into the hole. - -Almost instantly a hidden door flew noiselessly open, revealing a -flight of stone steps, leading downward into the bowels of the earth. - -A simultaneous cry of surprise left the lips of the swamp explorers as -this remarkable occurrence took place. - -They gazed into the opening for the space of a minute and no one spoke -a word. - -But suddenly they were called to their senses by hearing a wild cry at -their very elbow. - -The next moment a man and a dog rushed through their midst and sprang -down the stairway in the base of the obelisk. - - - - -CHAPTER IV. WHERE THE STAIRS LED TO. - - -Leo Malvern caught but a fleeting glance at the man and dog as they -rushed down the stairs in the base of the obelisk. - -But what was the stranger fleeing from? - -The swamp explorers glanced around them to find out. - -The next moment they learned to their full satisfaction. - -In the little clearing, a few yards beyond them, a balloon suddenly -settled. - -There was but one occupant of the basket, or car, and he was a -stern-visaged man of perhaps forty-two. - -It was evident that he had not yet seen our friends, for, as the -balloon, which was now about half collapsed, settled upon the earth, he -sprang from the basket and rushed in the direction taken by the man and -dog. - -A sudden thought came in Dick Vincey’s head. - -“Hide--quick!” he whispered to his companions. “He will most likely -enter the opening and go on down.” - -In the twinkling of an eye all hands sprang to the other side of the -obelisk and concealed themselves in a thicket. - -They were not a moment too soon. The next instant the man who had so -strangely landed in that wild spot rushed up to the base of the obelisk -and came to an abrupt halt. - -An exclamation of surprise left his lips as he beheld the opening in -the stone shaft. - -“By heavens!” he exclaimed, loud enough for the swamp explorers to -hear; “Reginald Lacy, you shall not escape me, even if I have to follow -you into the very center of the earth!” - -Then he boldly entered the doorway and began descending the stone steps. - -Five minutes later our friends made their way to the entrance again and -listened for some sound. - -But they could hear nothing. - -“I am going to make a suggestion,” suddenly said Leo. - -“What is it?” asked his cousin. - -“Let us go down the steps and see what has become of those who have -already gone down.” - -“Agreed!” exclaimed the professor, who was ready for anything. - -“Oh! for de good Lor’ sakes! don’t go down dere. De debbil am dere, -suah!” whined Lucky, in a frightened manner. - -“Keep still, coon, and don’t git skeered. We may as well go as far and -see as much as we kin, since we have got ter this dod-rotted country. -I, for one, are satisfied to go down them steps.” - -The Yankee gave a contemptuous glance at the darky as he spoke, and -then nodded for Leo to lead on. - -Dick had not passed his opinion on the question yet, but that he was -perfectly willing need scarcely be said. - -But at the same time it occurred to him that they ought to take some -sort of a light with them. - -They had left their supplies at the point where they had been compelled -to use the ax in the thicket. - -Dick hastened to the spot and got a small lantern, which was all that -was left of three that they had brought along with them. - -When he reached the obelisk again his companions had already entered -the doorway, and were waiting for him on the steps. - -It was but the work of a moment to strike a match and light the -lantern; and then the boy followed them down into the place beyond. - -Down they went, for at least a hundred steps, and the end of the flight -was not reached yet. - -Another hundred, and still it appeared the same. - -“I wonder how many miles we have got ter go afore we git ter ther -bottom?” said the Yankee. - -“Have patience, Martin,” replied Prof. Easy. “We are on the eve of a -great discovery--mark my word for it!” - -“Humph! I heerd ye say that same thing a good many times before. But, -by the great boots in ther haymow, I stepped on somethin’ alive jist -then!” - -“A ground hog!” exclaimed Dick, holding up the lantern. “How in thunder -did it ever get there, I wonder?” - -“If it can live in here, I am sure we can a little longer. Let us -proceed,” returned the professor, quietly. - -Once more they began descending the steps. - -During all this time they had not heard the least sound from those who -had preceded them. - -Probably one hundred and fifty steps more were descended, and then they -reached a wide passage. - -“Come,” said Leo, leading the way. “We have struck level traveling at -last.” - -The swamp explorers had not proceeded over three hundred yards, before -they saw daylight ahead. - -It seemed rather strange that it should be daylight, but it was, -nevertheless. - -With all possible speed they hastened along the passage. - -Two hundred yards more and a wonderful sight met their gaze. - -They were emerging into a vast tract of country many feet below the -earth’s crust. - -In front of them was the beginning of a long crack, which extended a -couple of miles or more, and all along the edges of this the water -streamed down in the form of a cascade of unlimited extent. - -The sunlight came in through the crack, which was probably a quarter of -a mile in width, and lighted up the place. - -All sorts of vegetation flourished on the place beneath the opening -above; but beyond this our friends could perceive nothing on account -of the falling water and the mist arising from the streams in which it -fell. - -“Wonderful!” exclaimed the professor. - -“Darned if it ain’t wonderful,” assented Haypole. - -“Who ever imagined that such a place as this existed?” said Leo. - -“We are now under the great Everglades of Florida. It remains for us to -find out what sort of place it is,” spoke up Dick Vincey. - -“I agree with you there,” returned Prof. Easy. “Come, let us be moving. -It is strange what has become of the man and dog and their pursuer.” - -They stepped off to the left, and kept walking until they emerged from -the mist, which seemed to settle back on either side of the opening. - -As they left it behind them they saw that only a sort of twilight -prevailed in and about the underground place. - -Then a startling thing occurred. - -A body of men suddenly appeared from the numerous galleries, to be seen -on their left, and rushed toward them. - -There must have been fully a hundred of them, and all were attired -in long gowns of some dark-colored material, and were barefooted and -without any head covering. - -The strange horde had the appearance of Turks, both in manner and looks. - -The moment Leo and Dick beheld them, they placed their rifles to their -shoulders. - -Their action was quickly followed by their companions, and then Leo -exclaimed: - -“Halt! We mean you no harm!” - -But the command was entirely disregarded. The crowd of men rushed at -them with a quicker pace, if possible, brandishing spears and bows and -arrows. - -When within about fifty feet of the intruders, they came to a sudden -halt and sent a flight of arrows at them. - -One of these found lodgment in the fleshy part of Martin Haypole’s leg, -and another went through the crown of the professor’s hat. - -Leo and Dick thought it high time for them to act. - -Dropping to their knees, they began firing into the ranks of the -queerly attired strangers. - -Crack! crack! - -The reports rang out in rapid succession, and at almost every shot a -man fell. - -At first they seemed to be staggered and amazed, but they soon rallied -and answered the rifle shots, by another flight of arrows. - -It now behooved our friends to look for a place of cover. - -A few yards distant was the mouth of a gallery or passage, and at the -command of Leo Malvern they rushed for this with all possible speed. - -The inhabitants of the underground place came after them with all their -might, uttering, for the first time, loud yells of triumph. - -“Hurry up!” cried Dick; “if we can reach the mouth of that passage -we’ll give ’em fits.” - -The arrows kept flying all around them, and Lucky, the darky, was -wounded in the arm. - -A minute more and the spot was reached in safety. - -“Now!” exclaimed Leo, “give it to them! Everybody fire as fast as he -can.” - -The next instant five rifles began sending a veritable hailstorm of -bullets. - -Down went seven or eight of the savage barbarians, as the professor -chose to term them, and several more began hopping about like mad from -the wounds they had received. - -Leo expected to see them turn and flee now, since he and his companions -had reached a place where they could most likely hold their own. - -But no! They kept on shooting their arrows, which, by the way, did our -friends not the least bit of harm, as they had crouched behind a huge -bowlder. - -But in spite of the determined stand our friends made, they were doomed -to defeat. - -Suddenly they heard a pattering of feet behind them, and, on turning, -beheld a crowd of the savages coming through the passage. - -They were between two fires! - - - - -CHAPTER V. THE DANCE OF DEATH. - - -“God help us!” exclaimed Prof. Easy, as he saw the strange inhabitants -of the underground place rushing for them from both front and rear. - -But “God helps those who help themselves,” and both Leo Malvern and -Dick Vincey were fully aware of this. They made up their minds that -they would not be killed or captured until they had used every effort -to drive away their enemies. - -Brave, young fellows! But what could they hope to accomplish against -such fearful odds? - -Martin Haypole was the only man they had to stick to them now, as both -the professor and Lucky at once threw down their weapons when they -observed the horde approaching through the passage. - -“Keep on firing!” shouted Leo, “and when they close on us use your -revolvers.” - -“No--no!” replied the professor; “let us surrender. It is the best -thing to do, I think.” - -“Never!” exclaimed Dick, and his reply was echoed by his cousin and the -intrepid Yankee. - -Nearer approached the swarming savages, and presently our friends were -hemmed in from all possible means of escape. - -It seemed that every man that fell had two or three to take his place. - -At length there was a combined rush from all quarters, and the swamp -explorers were forced to the ground and made prisoners. - -This caused their hopes to rise a trifle. - -They were not to be killed at present, and that was one consoling -thought. - -Their captors seemed to be very gleeful over the fact of having made -them prisoners, and at once proceeded to bind their arms behind them, -after having first divested them of their weapons. - -Then the five swamp explorers were lifted to their feet in their -deplorable condition. - -“I wonder what in thunderation the scamps are a-goin’ ter do with us,” -observed the Yankee. - -“The Lord only knows,” groaned Prof. Easy, who now was thoroughly -frightened. - -“We will have to trust to luck,” said Leo. - -“We is done gwine ter be killed--’deed we is!” exclaimed Lucky, in a -despondent tone. - -“Wait until you are sure of that before you say it again,” replied Dick. - -Then turning to the crowd surrounding them, he continued: - -“Come! what are you standing there for? Why don’t you take us to the -place you intend to, and have done with it?” - -It seemed that he was understood, for without any further ado two men -seized each of the captives, and the whole crowd started off down the -passage. - -It was rather dark in the tunnel-like place, and when they had -traversed about three hundred yards, our friends were unable to see any -of their surroundings. - -But in a very few minutes they saw light ahead of them, and objects -again became distinguishable. - -A cry of wonder broke from the lips of the five as they were marched -out into the light. If they had been surprised when they first entered -the underground place, they were even more than surprised now. - -They found themselves in a natural cave of many acres in extent, in -which was a small village of stone huts. - -The queerest thing about the place was that the top of the cave--if -cave it could really be called--was entirely open in a circle of six or -seven hundred yards in diameter. This admitted both light and rain, and -hence it was that an unlimited supply of vegetation could be seen about. - -The opening above was many feet from the ground upon which the stone -huts were built, and there was no possible means of getting to the -level ground above without the aid of an immense ladder. - -“Well, this jist beats the Jews!” ejaculated Haypole. “This place looks -like a big watermelon hollered out and one of ther ends cut off. I -think if I knowed that song called ‘Down in a Coal Mine,’ I’d sing it.” - -The prisoners were led along until they came to the largest building -visible to them, and there a halt was called. - -There were no doors to any of the huts, which showed that the -inhabitants were not afraid of being robbed by their neighbors. The -crowd who had charge of our friends faced the main doorway of the -building they had halted in front of, and then clapped their hands. - -Almost immediately a rustle was heard, and the figure of a female came -out. - -As soon as she appeared every person in sight, save the five captives, -dropped to their knees and turned their faces to the ground. - -With a look of wonderment upon their faces the swamp explorers eyed -the girl--for she did not look to be over eighteen at the most--and -marveled at her rare beauty. - -She was attired in a trailing, white gown of some gauzy material, and -her face was partly concealed by a fold of the same, which was thrown -around her shoulders and across her mouth. - -The look from her dazzling bright eyes showed that she was surprised at -seeing the strangers. - -But only for an instant did her gaze rest upon them. - -Turning quickly to those who had brought them there, she clapped her -hands three times. - -All arose to their feet and saluted her. - -Then, to the surprise of Prof. Easy, one of the men stepped forward and -began addressing the girl in Spanish. - -“Oh, queen,” said he, “here are five more people who have dared find -their way into the land of Hez. What shall be their doom? Shall they be -confined in the magic chamber with the other prisoner to witness the -dance of death, or shall they be slaughtered at once?” - -“Conduct them to the magic chamber,” said the queen, with an imperious -wave of her hand. - -She turned to enter the building, when the professor, who could speak -Spanish fluently, exclaimed: - -“Most gracious queen, listen a moment, please!” - -At this the girl turned as if she had been stung, and the fold of her -garment, becoming loosened, fell from her face, revealing the most -beautiful countenance our friends had ever looked upon, or even dreamed -of. - -“Heavens!” thought Dick Vincey, “what a beautiful creature.” - -The queen had fixed her eyes upon the face of the professor. - -“Were you addressing me, sir?” she demanded. - -“I was, oh, queen,” he returned. “I would like to say, in behalf of my -companions and myself, that if we did wrong in coming to this place, -we were not aware of it. Surely you will not condemn us to death for -making such a mistake.” - -“Enough! Away with them to the magic chamber, and let them witness the -dance of death.” - -With these words she swept gracefully into the house, and the Hezzians, -as we shall now call the natives, seized the prisoners and led them -from the spot. - -None of the party, save Prof. Easy, could understand any other language -than their own, and they were all very curious as to what was going to -be done with them. - -“What did she say when you spoke to her, professor?” asked Leo. - -“She has sentenced us to be shut up in a place called the magic -chamber, where there is now a captive already, and witness the dance of -death. What will follow I am not prepared to say. That beautiful but -hard-hearted creature is the queen of this strange country, and what -she says seems to be law.” - -“She don’t look as though she would have us killed,” observed Haypole. -“I seen her castin’ sheep’s-eyes at Dick while we was a-standin’ there. -Ther only thing that’ll save us is for him ter make love to her.” - -“I’d do that willingly enough, if I thought it would save our lives,” -said Dick. - -Leo and the Yankee laughed in spite of their situation. - -It struck them that Dick would be glad to pay his attentions to the -beautiful queen, even if it would not benefit them. - -But there was no time for further conversation now. The Hezzians had -halted at what appeared to be the extreme end of the cave. - -Half a dozen of them used their combined efforts to roll a rock aside, -which revealed a small opening. - -Into this they filed, taking our friends with them. - -It was dark as pitch inside, but at a word from one of the men a light -suddenly appeared. - -How it came so quickly our friends were at first at a loss to -understand, but in a few seconds it was made plain to them. - -As their eyes became accustomed to the ghostly glare the light made, -they began looking around them. - -They found that the place into which they had been conducted was a cave -of about one hundred feet square. - -In the center, upon the floor, a man attired in the habiliments of -civilization sat, with his arms bound behind him. - -A single glance sufficed to show the swamp explorers that it was the -man who had left the balloon and started down the stairs in quest of -the one with the dog. - -He looked up when he saw men of his own appearance approaching, and a -smile lit up his countenance. - -The five prisoners were at once placed at the side of this man, and -then those who had brought them thither immediately left the cave. - -Then it was that they first saw what caused the light. - -A girl, who was almost as beautiful as the queen herself, had entered -through a passage at the other side of the cave at about the same time -they had. - -She carried a blazing torch, which she waved to and fro in a weird sort -of fashion. - -A heavy band of metal was about her neck, and upon her wrists bracelets -glittered and flashed in the rays of light. - -She began walking in a circle about the six prisoners. - -When she had made the circuit five times, a low, grinding music struck -up from some unseen place near by. - -Almost instantly a slight commotion was heard, and fully forty girls, -attired the same as the first, entered the cave. - -Each one carried a lighted torch, and the flame of each shed forth a -light of different hue. - -As soon as they had placed themselves in position, the hidden music -changed to a quick air, and they began to dance in a wild, graceful -sort of way. - -For five minutes the girls kept up the dance, and then a change -occurred. - -An ominous, rattling sound was heard, and a score of human skeletons -dropped from above and stood upright upon the ground. - -Then the dance began in earnest, the skeletons joining in, it seemed. - -The girls struck up a chant in time with the music, which had again -changed, and began gliding about, right and left, with their grewsome -partners. - -Lucky, the darky, whose nerves were not overstrong, fainted away, while -the rest of the party felt an icy chill gliding down their backs. - -Probably the least interested one in the party was the man who had been -in the cave when our friends entered. - -He gazed at the scene with a look of indifference on his face, and even -smiled when the girls grasped the hideous relics of humanity about -their fleshless waists and whirled them around. - -Round and round spun the dancers, oftentimes nearly stumbling over the -captives upon the floor. - -Suddenly one of the fair dancers got tangled up with her “partner,” and -stumbled headlong over Leo. - -As she did so, the boy heard a metallic ring close beside him. - -As soon as she arose to her feet and glided away, he saw a knife lying -upon the ground. - -Moving slightly, he kicked Dick gently. - -“What’s up?” asked his cousin, taking his eyes from the curious scene -for a moment. - -“I have found a knife,” was the whispered reply. “I am going to get -hold of it with my teeth and cut your hands loose.” - -Rolling over on his stomach, he seized the knife by the handle in a -strong grip between his teeth. - -Dick turned so his back was toward Leo, and then the boy began sawing -away at the bonds which held his hands together. - -It was a difficult job, but Leo was plucky, and presently he was -rewarded by seeing his cousin’s hands free. - -Then it was but the work of a moment for Dick to liberate him. - -“Now,” said Leo, “cut the rest free.” - -Just as he was about to do so, a crowd of hideous-appearing men, -attired in the skins of various animals, rushed in the cave, and -seizing about half of the dancing girls, carried them screaming from -the spot. - -Then the dance ceased as if by magic. - -There was now but one girl left to each skeleton, and these placed -their fair, white arms about the necks of the horrible objects. - -The music now clashed into a sound like the shriek of a doomed soul, -and then both girls and skeletons began to rise slowly in the air. - -“By heavens!” exclaimed Leo, springing to his feet; “I am going to know -the cause of some of this humbug.” - -Springing forward, he seized one of the girls about the waist and gave -a tug downward. - -Then something snapped above them, and down came the girl, bringing the -skeleton with her, knocking the daring boy flat upon his back. - - - - -CHAPTER VI. “ESTO PERPETUA.” - - -Leo Malvern sprang to his feet, and seized the girl by the shoulders. - -“Utter a single cry and I will kill you!” he exclaimed. - -She seemed to understand him, for she did not make the least effort to -cry out. - -“Do you understand what I say?” he asked. - -“I do!” was the reply, in fair English. - -“Then arise to your feet and lead us from this place.” - -“Will you protect me if I get into trouble?” - -“I will--with my life!” - -“Then be it so. Come!” - -The torch which the girl had possessed was still smoldering upon the -floor, and quickly stamping this out, she seized Leo by the arm, and -directed the rest to catch hold of him for a guide. - -Then she started swiftly across the cave and entered the mouth of a -passage. - -Along a dark, narrow passage they made their way, until a large, -vaultlike chamber was reached. - -Here the girl came to a halt, and, placing her hand upon the shoulder -of Leo, said: - -“I have brought you to the burial place of our people. You will be safe -here, for there are hundreds of nooks and niches to conceal yourselves -in. I will go back and endeavor to find your weapons for you.” - -“But,” said Leo, “I promised to protect you if you got into trouble. -How am I to do so if you leave us?” - -“It matters not; come a few paces this way; I would say something that -is for your ears alone.” - -The boy allowed her to lead him a few yards from his companions. - -Then the beautiful girl seized him by the hands, and exclaimed: - -“Let me tell you what caused me to break the laws of Hez and lead you -from the magic chamber. I saw your face pictured in a dream a few -nights ago, and the dream led me to believe that I was looking upon -the face of my future lord and master. It was so real, that when I saw -you, when you bade me rise to my feet after pulling me down with the -skeleton, that I could not refuse to aid you. I believe in dreams, do -you not?” - -“Well--er--sometimes,” replied Leo, completely staggered at the girl’s -speech. - -“I knew you did. Then listen: I swear to protect you and your friends -as long as you remain in the land of Hez. Now, tell me your name, my -future lord and master.” - -“Leo Malvern.” - -“’Tis well. I shall ever remember it. Mine is Azurma. I am a member of -the royal family.” - -The girl kissed his hand fervently and then left the spot, while Leo -groped his way to the side of his companions, to whom he related what -had occurred. - -Prof. Easy then informed Philander Owens as to who he and his -companions were, and why they had chosen to brave the dangers of the -great swamp, after which all hands lapsed into silence. - -Finally Dick broke it by exclaiming: - -“I don’t see any use of our remaining in this dark place until that -girl comes back. I, for one, am going back into the place called the -magic chamber and light a torch and see what it is like in there.” - -“Hold on!” exclaimed the professor. “Haven’t you already seen that it -does not pay to be rash? Just have a little patience and sit down and -wait.” - -“I am sorry, but I can’t comply with your request,” returned the -adventurous boy. “I am deeply interested in the cave where the dance of -death took place. Come on; who is going with me?” - -“Gosh hang it!” exclaimed Haypole; “I’ll go.” - -“Better wait, Dick,” said Leo, who was anxious to be there when Azurma -came back. - -“Oh, that’s all right, old fellow. We won’t run into any danger. We’ll -see you later.” - -With these words, Dick and the Yankee felt their way along until they -came to the passage leading from the vault. - -Having once found it, they boldly entered and walked softly along. - -They kept on for fully five minutes, and then it occurred to Dick that -they ought to have entered the magic chamber by this time. - -He produced a match from his pocket and struck it. - -To his astonishment he found himself in a small, open square, with -four passages branching off in different directions. - -By the flickering light of the match in his companion’s hand the Yankee -saw a torch lying upon the floor. - -Stooping down, he picked it up and lighted it. - -“Now, I guess we will be able ter find ther way,” said he. - -“I guess so. Ah! what have we here?” exclaimed Dick, pointing to a -smooth rock, upon which were several inscriptions. - -Haypole held the torch nearer, and they saw a long column of names -engraved upon the rock. - -But they were Spanish, and they failed to make them out. - -Beneath them was a hand with the index finger pointing to a passage at -their right. - -“This must be the way out, Martin,” said Dick. “Come on; we will follow -this passage.” - -“Good enough!” returned the Yankee, and they at once set out. - -But they soon found that the passage went downward instead of on a -level, as the one they had before traversed. - -However, they did not turn back; the hand upon the rock pointed that -way, and both were anxious to see what it meant. - -Down they went for fully fifteen minutes, and then they observed a -bright light ahead of them. - -But it was not the light of day that they saw; it was a sort of pale, -greenish tint. - -In a few minutes they emerged into a vast chamber of a conical shape, -which seemed to be lighted by electricity, though where the seat of the -light was located they could not tell. - -In the center of the conical-shaped cavern was a pool of crystal water, -from which a sparkling fountain shot upward, sending a myriad of -glistening drops scatteringly through space. - -In the curious light that prevailed the fountain resembled a monster -Roman candle, and the two who gazed upon the scene for the first time -were entranced at the wonderful spectacle. - -The pool of water rested in a natural basin of rock, and a slanting -floor of white stone stretched out from its edges. - -After gazing at the fountain for a while, Dick led the way to the edge -of the pool. - -Here, for the first time, he noticed a tablet of stone which leaned -against a bowlder. - -The boy gave a start and pointed to it, at the same time calling his -companion’s attention. - -Upon the tablet was engraved a hand, like the one they had seen at -the point where the four passages met, and the index finger pointed -directly into the pool of sparkling water. - -Beneath the hand was the rough delineation of a rose in full bloom, and -under all were the words: - - “ESTO PERPETUA.” - -Dick’s small acquaintance with Latin told him that _esto perpetua_ -meant: “Let it be perpetual,” and he wondered what it could all mean. - -While he was studying over the subject, a slight noise was heard in the -direction they came from. - -Instinctively he clutched the Yankee by the sleeve, and both dropped to -the ground behind the bowlder against which the tablet rested. - - - - -CHAPTER VII. THE LEGEND OF HEZ. - - -Dick and the Yankee had no sooner sought seclusion behind the bowlder -than a man of ragged and unkempt appearance came from the mouth of the -passage with a dog at his side. - -Both gave a violent start of surprise. - -It was the man and dog who had entered the base of the obelisk before -them. - -The stranger still carried a rifle, and as Haypole saw this he clutched -his companion by the shoulder and exclaimed, in a low tone: - -“Ther infernal skunk has got my rifle! It sartainly is he who stole it -that night in th’ swamp.” - -“Never mind,” whispered Dick. “Let’s watch him and see what he is up -to.” - -The man, who has been spoken of as Reginald Lacy, paused near the edge -of the pool and looked at his surroundings with an air of extreme -surprise. - -He patted the dog upon the head in an affectionate way and said: - -“Well, Jupiter, we have struck a wonderful country. But we are not -safe, old fellow--not by any means. Owens is still upon our track, and -he evidently means business. But he shall never kill me, Jupiter; I may -deserve it, but I will never die at his hands.” - -The dog wagged his tail and crouched at his master’s feet, who, -surveying the clear water before him, went on: - -“That water looks cool and tempting; I believe I will take a bath.” - -With that Reginald Lacy began removing his tattered garments, -preparatory to taking a plunge in the crystal pool. - -In a very short time he was ready, and, walking down to the edge of the -pool, he placed his hand in the water to test its temperature. - -It must have been perfectly satisfactory, for without further -hesitation he plunged in. - -The dog gazed at his master for a moment and then followed suit. - -The effect upon the man and dog seemed to be startling. - -They sported about in the crystal water, apparently imbued with new -life and strength. - -“This is glorious!” Dick and the Yankee heard the man say, as he stood -neck deep in the water under the spray of the fountain. - -The dog answered with yelps of delight as he swam swiftly about and -sported to his heart’s content. - -“By Jove!” whispered Dick, to his companion, “the water does look -inviting; it wouldn’t be a bad idea for us to take a swim.” - -“I guess I don’t want any of it,” returned the Yankee. “That dod-rotted -water don’t look nat’ral to my eyes. Look at that feller; he seems ter -be gittin’ crazy--gosh! if he don’t!” - -Reginald Lacy was acting rather queer for a man! He was cutting up all -sorts of boyish antics and laughing like mad. - -Presently he waded ashore, and, after washing the rags he had worn, put -them on wet, as they were, and entered the passage again, calling the -dog after him. - -As soon as they had disappeared from view, Dick and Haypole came from -behind the bowlder. - -“Let’s follow him, Martin,” said Dick; “maybe he knows the way out of -this place.” - -“All right,” returned the Yankee. “It are about time we went back to -ther place whar we left the professor an’ ther rest, anyhow.” - -Picking up the torch, which they had thrown upon the ground when they -first entered the wonderful cavern, Dick lighted it, and they started -up the passage after Reginald Lacy and his dog. - -But they could neither see nor hear any signs of them as they trudged -along, and at length, when they reached the spot where the four -passages met, they were forced to acknowledge that he had eluded them -in some unexplained manner. - -“Well, what in thunder will we do now?” asked the Yankee, as he took a -seat upon the ground. - -“Do?” replied the boy. “Why, go on through one of the passages until we -find our companions. Let’s make a bee line through the one to our left.” - -“All right; I’m with you.” - -With Dick in the lead, they started swiftly along the passage. - -Presently they heard the sounds of approaching footsteps. - -“Somebody coming ter look fer us, I’ll bet a dollar,” remarked Haypole. - -“I shouldn’t wonder. What shall we do--go on and meet whoever it is, or -wait till they come up?” - -“Let’s wait.” - -“All right,” and leaning against the rocky wall, Dick listened to the -sounds which were coming nearer every second. - -They soon perceived a light, and the next minute saw a number of the -men of Hez approaching, carrying torches. - -That our two friends were perceived at the same time was plainly -evident, for the strangely attired men uttered exclamations of -pleasure, and motioned the pair not to be afraid. - -At the same time one of their number called out, in good English: - -“Fear not, my friends. No harm shall befall you. We have come in search -of you, at the queen’s order. Your friends and companions are safe and -sound, and await you.” - -“Who in thunder are you?” asked Haypole, stepping forward. - -“I am an American, like yourself. But, come! There is no time for -parleying now. Follow us, and you will be safe.” - -“Lead on!” exclaimed Dick Vincey. “I am glad the queen wants us; I can -have another look at her handsome face.” - -Away went the men with Dick and Haypole in their midst, through various -passages and caves, until finally they came in sight of the village of -stone buildings. - -It did not take the two returned wanderers long to observe Leo and the -professor standing in front of one of the houses, and they were now -satisfied that no harm would befall them. - -Leo and Prof. Easy rushed forward to meet them, and while they were -talking together the man in charge of the searching party went to -report to Queen Olive. - -“Where have you fellows been?” asked Leo, shaking his cousin’s hand. - -“To the queerest and most beautiful spot mortal eyes ever rested upon,” -replied Dick. - -And then he proceeded to relate where he and the Yankee had been, and -what they had seen. - -“Wonderful!” exclaimed the professor; and then turning to the man who -spoke English in the crowd of Hezzians who had brought the two lost -ones back, he said: - -“Do you know anything of this pool and fountain, my man?” - -“I do,” was the reply; “it is the identical fountain Ponce de Leon was -in search of so many years ago. If you want to learn all about it, -converse with Roderique de Amilo, the one who discovered it. There he -is over there in front of his dwelling.” - -“Is that Roderique de Amilo?” asked Leo. “Why, he is crazy, is he not?” - -“No; anything but crazy, as you will find when you become better -acquainted with him. He is the discoverer of the magic fountain and the -founder of this race. - -“Yes,” went on the man, seating himself upon a rock; “I may as well -tell you all about it now as any other time, since you are all to be -citizens of Hez in the future. It is a queer story, and I have not said -that I believe it. - -“To begin, my name is Andrew Jones; I am from Kentucky, and have no -relatives living save my wife, who is a native of this place. I came -here a little over a year ago, and expect to stay here as long as I -live. - -“Roderique de Amilo is the founder of this race, though he seldom -admits it. He discovered this underground country in the year 1509, by -being washed over the falls into the river you passed on entering here. - -“While here he discovered the fountain you speak of, and feeling -satisfied that it was the one he was in search of, he bathed in it, the -result being that he attained perpetual youth. - -“Then it dawned upon him that he should have a helpmate; so one day -he went to the edge of the pool and prayed for a wife, and lo! before -his prayer was finished there arose from the crystal water the most -beautiful woman man had ever seen! - -“Well, to make a long story short, De Amilo took her for his wife, and -from them came these people, who number about three hundred, outside of -those who came here after. - -“You have the legend just as everybody who comes here gets it. You may -draw your own conclusions from it, as I have done.” - -“Well, I don’t believe it,” said Haypole, bluntly. - -Andrew Jones laughed. - -“Few do,” said he; “and none seem to care much.” - -“But how about the beautiful woman who came from the pool in such a -mysterious manner?” said Dick. “Surely that was not Queen Olive?” - -“Oh, no!” replied Jones; “I forgot to tell you about her. She visited -the pool one day after she had lived here in the neighborhood of a -hundred years, and concluded to bathe in its clear waters. The moment -she entered it she disappeared, and has never been heard of since.” - -“That yarn would make a first-class fairy story for little children,” -said Leo, laughing. “But, anyhow, I shan’t dispute it. Ah! here comes -the queen’s messenger after Dick and Martin, I suppose. Go on, fellows, -and take the iron-clad oath of allegiance to Hez.” - -Sure enough, Dick and the Yankee were led to the queen’s house, and -while they were gone Leo and the rest busied themselves in cleaning -their weapons, which Roderique de Amilo had so kindly returned to them. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII. DICK VINCEY AND THE QUEEN. - - -Queen Olive stood in the doorway of the handsomely furnished stone -building, called the palace, when Dick and the Yankee were brought up. - -With a wave of her hand she ordered the Hezzians to retire, and then -motioned the two to follow her inside. - -Dick noticed that the beautiful queen eyed him with a more than -ordinary look, and he was not a little puzzled over it. - -But he was destined to know what it meant ere long. Martin Haypole had -mentioned in a joke that the queen of Hez had fallen in love with the -good-looking Dick Vincey, and this was indeed the case. - -The graceful creature led them to the table on which rested the strip -of parchment containing the signatures of those who had signed the -agreement to stay in the land of Hez forever. - -Dick glanced over these, and saw the names of Leo and the rest of his -companions, and, consequently, he had little hesitation in taking the -oath. - -“Now, then,” observed Queen Olive, “you may retire to the company of -your friends; I would speak a few words in private to this young man.” - -The Yankee at once took his departure, and the fair ruler of Hez led -Dick into a handsomely furnished apartment. - -She motioned him to a seat on a divan of dyed skins, and then blew a -tiny whistle attached to one of her bracelets. - -Almost immediately a servant appeared and bowed to the floor. - -The queen addressed her in Spanish for a moment, and she retired, only -to return five minutes later with a stone tray containing a choice -repast, the sight of which made Dick’s mouth water. - -“You are hungry, I know--appease your appetite.” - -He did not wait for a second invitation, but at once proceeded to eat, -all the while wondering why it was that he was treated in such a royal -manner. - -When he had satisfied his appetite the queen again blew her whistle, -and the servant returned, bringing in a decanter and a couple of -drinking vessels. - -She then took the tray and retired. - -“Now, then,” said her majesty, as she poured some amber-colored liquid -from the decanter, “to begin with, I want you to tell me your name.” - -This Dick promptly did, and then, following the example of his fair -hostess, placed the beverage she had poured from the decanter to his -lips. - -It had such a peculiar, exhilarating taste that he drained the cup at a -single gulp. - -Of all the wines he had ever drunk, that certainly was the best. - -That it was intoxicating, he knew, for the moment he had swallowed it -a sort of dreamy feeling of the deepest content came over him, and -he settled back upon the divan and gazed into the face of the lovely -creature before him with a listless smile upon his countenance. - -“Do you think you will ever want to leave this land?” asked Queen -Olive, as she took a seat before him. - -“No,” returned Dick; “never--as long as you remain here.” - -Instead of becoming offended at this speech, a look of pleasure came -over her face. - -“Why? Am I more beautiful than the ladies of your own country?” she -asked. - -“Yes--a thousand times yes!” - -“Do you like me?” - -This question staggered the boy, and he involuntarily half arose to his -feet. - -Did he like her! What a question for such a beautiful creature to ask -him! And she a queen, too! - -“Why, what do you mean?” he stammered, in reply. - -“I mean just this: I have selected you as the man to be my future -husband. It was decreed long ago that no queen who ruled the land of -Hez should ever marry, unless her husband be a man who was not a native -of the place. Thus far such has happened regularly, there always being -a stranger to arrive here at about the right time. But this time more -than one came, and out of the number I have chosen you.” - -“But,” interposed Dick, who had settled back upon the divan again, and -returned to his half-listless condition, “why should you choose me--a -complete stranger, and entirely unknown to you?” - -“Because I love you!” - -“Well, you see, oh, queen, while you have long considered the question -of marriage, I have never given the subject a thought until now. You -must give me time to study over the question.” - -“You may have as much time as you desire,” she said; “that is, if you -answer one question to my satisfaction.” - -“What is that question, oh, queen?” - -“Don’t address me by that title--call me Olive,” she exclaimed, rising -and laying her hand upon his shoulder. “The question I would ask is, Do -you love me?” - -For the space of a minute a deep silence reigned, and then Dick Vincey -spoke: - -“I do, Olive.” - -He stretched forth his arms as if to fold her to his bosom, but she -waved him back with a pleased laugh. - -“I am glad,” was all she said. And then she motioned him to retire to -the companionship of his friends. - -Much mystified, Dick obeyed. - -He was half angry at being turned aside just as he had made his -declaration of love; but then he did not know that the queen was but -putting him to the test to see if he was sincere. - -“What’s the matter, old fellow?” asked Leo, as Dick approached the -house that had been given to the swamp explorers. “You look as though -you were worried over something.” - -“Oh, I am all right,” was the reply; and then he took the weapons -belonging to him, strapping the belt about his waist and thrusting the -pair of revolvers and hunting knife into it. - -“How did you make out with ther gal--queen?” said Haypole, who stood in -the doorway perfectly contented, now that he had had a good meal, and -was in the company of Prof. Easy and the rest. - -“That reminds me,” exclaimed Dick, suddenly. “I left something in the -palace; I’ll go and get it, I guess.” - -Then, before he could be questioned any further, he started back to the -house of Queen Olive. - -Arriving there, he did not hesitate, but boldly walked in. - -The handsome queen was waiting for him, it seemed, for she met him in -the hallway, and conducted him again to the room he had before been led -into. - -“I knew you would come back,” said she, quietly. - -“Why?” he asked, in a petulant manner. - -“Because you really love me.” - -“I told you I did before you dismissed me a few moments ago.” - -“Ah! but this proves it. And now, let me say, I shall consider myself -engaged to you. But our marriage cannot take place under two years from -the time of our first meeting--that is one of the laws of this country.” - -“Laws be blowed!” exclaimed Dick. “If I was willing to marry you now I -might change my mind before that time.” - -“But you will not, though. Two years hence we will be man and wife, -and you will be the happiest man in the Land of Hez, and I will be the -happiest woman!” - -Then there was a pause, after which Olive, as she desired Dick to call -her, poured out some more of the wine and handed it to her lover. - -As soon as the boy had drunk it, the same feeling of content, as on -former occasions, came over him, and he grew talkative. - -“Tell me about this wonderful country, Olive,” said he, taking her by -the hand. - -“That I will gladly do, Dick,” replied she, with equal familiarity, and -she proceeded to relate the same legend as told by Andrew Jones a short -time before. - -“Do you believe that story, Olive?” he asked. - -“I hardly know whether I do or not. It seems so strange and unnatural. -Yet Roderique de Amilo was as he is now as long ago as the oldest of -our people can remember.” - -“How is it that he does not rule the Land of Hez himself?” - -“Because, the legend states, that he agreed with his beautiful wife -that it should forever be ruled by woman. It was for that reason that -she plunged into the pool, thinking it would prove a perpetual life to -her.” - -“Has anybody else ever bathed in the pool?” - -“Oh, yes; a dozen or more. But not until a few years ago; none of our -people would ever believe the story before.” - -“Then some do believe it now?” - -“Yes, a few, and there must be something wonderful about the crystal -waters of the fountain, for those who have bathed in it have never -visibly grown older.” - -“I think I shall have to take a bath in it some day myself,” said Dick, -with a smile. - -“And I, too,” replied Olive, thinking he meant it. “It would be so -nice, when we are married, to go on living and never grow old, with -no fear of dying, unless through some accident. Could anyone ask for -anything more than that?” - -Dick was about to make a reply, when the report of a rifle rang out -close by. - -Hastily excusing himself, he dashed from the room outside. - -He beheld the man known as Reginald Lacy fleeing across the level -country beneath the opening in the roof, and after him, in hot -pursuit, was Philander Owens, a still smoking rifle in his hands. - - - - -CHAPTER IX. THE DEVIL’S KINGDOM. - - -Dick at once made his way to the side of Leo, who was just coming from -the house, followed by Haypole and the professor. - -“Great Scott!” exclaimed Dick. “Owens seems to be very savage against -that ragged stranger. What shall we do--help him catch him?” - -“No,” returned his cousin. “It is no affair of ours; let them settle -their own difficulty.” - -“That’s right,” nodded Prof. Easy. “We do not understand their case, -and should, therefore, let them alone.” - -“Ter tell ther truth, I don’t like either one of them fellers,” -observed the Yankee. “They be too blamed mysterious for me.” - -But if our friends did not attempt to assist Philander Owens in -catching Reginald Lacy, the men of Hez were not going to allow him to -roam about their haunts without first taking the oath of allegiance to -the tribe. - -Roderique de Amilo quickly called a score of men together and started -in pursuit after Owens, who was doing his best to overtake his enemy. - -All soon disappeared, and then our friends set about to fix up their -home to suit their tastes. - -They arose soon after daylight, and after they had eaten a light -breakfast, prepared to look around a bit. - -Then it struck Leo that it was about time he saw something of Azurma, -the girl who had conducted them from the magic cave. From the strain -in which she had conversed to him, he thought she would again seek his -presence long before this. - -Prof. Easy was bent on seeing what kind of place Hez was, and, at his -request, a party was formed to make a tour of the place. - -The party was formed of but seven--Leo, Dick, Prof. Easy, Martin -Haypole, Lucky, the darky, and the American known as Andrew Jones, and -Roderique de Amilo. - -They set out in the direction taken by Reginald Lacy and his persistent -pursuer. - -“A wonderful land is this,” remarked De Amilo, as they walked along. -“I have never fully explored it myself in all the years I have lived -here. Nearly everything you will meet and see that interests you will -be found to be mysterious. In fact, this whole country is a land of -mystery.” - -“It was a dod-rotted mystery how we ever come ter git in here, anyhow,” -said the Yankee. - -“That reminds me,” put in Andrew Jones, suddenly. “How did you get the -door in the obelisk open, anyway?” - -The professor quickly explained how they had found the stone cube, and -the use they had put it to. - -“By Jove!” exclaimed Jones. “The very identical way that I got in -myself. How can it be that the cube was missing from the hole in which -it fitted, and found so many yards from the obelisk?” - -“That’s where the mystery comes in,” said Leo. - -“Yes, that’s so. I forgot what kind of place I was in. Talking to my -own countrymen made me think I was back in civilization again.” - -They had by this time entered one of the many passages, and torches -were put in use. - -At the suggestion of Dick, Roderique de Amilo led them to the fountain -and pool, and Leo and the professor were surprised beyond measure at -what they saw. - -The Spaniard pointed to what was inscribed upon the stone tablet, and -said: - -“I did that; and I am the living proof that what it means is true.” - -Then he again went over the legend of Hez, and wound up by pointing -to the identical spot in the pool where the beautiful woman, whom he -afterward made his wife, arose so mysteriously. - -De Amilo told his story in such a solemn way that his hearers were more -or less impressed with it. - -“I believe that in some manner that man has become satisfied that yarn -is true himself,” said Leo, in a whisper to his cousin. - -“Yes,” assented Dick; “either that or else the legend is true, after -all.” - -Leo smiled. - -“Why, you don’t believe it, do you, old fellow? Has the beautiful queen -told you the same thing?” - -“She did tell me the same story, and I am not prepared to say whether I -believe it or not.” - -At this juncture their conductors signified that they were going to -leave the pool in the strangely lighted cavern, and the conversation -ended for the time. - -“We will now show you the devil’s kingdom, which is one of the most -wonderful sights to be seen in this land,” observed Jones, as they -entered the passage again. - -It was here that De Amilo came to a halt. Turning to those who were -following him, he said: - -“Is there anybody among you who desires to live forever? If so, bathe -in the pool beneath the spray of the fountain.” - -But all hands, even to Jones, shook their heads, and they went on their -way, the Spaniard leading them in silence. - -When they arrived at the point where the four passages met, they again -came to a halt. - -A moment later they started through the mouth of one of these, and -presently found themselves going down a sort of winding stairs. - -Down, down they went for many feet, and then they came to a vast, -shell-like cavern of what appeared to be almost unlimited size. - -It was illumined by a strange, flickering, red light, and a purple mist -pervaded the atmosphere. - -Full of curiosity, our friends followed their conductors until they -came to a broad roadway, that certainly looked as though it had been -built with human hands. - -Along this, for perhaps a quarter of a mile, they went, and then they -saw that it suddenly shot downward at an angle of forty-five degrees. - -As they rounded a cleft of rock, Andrew Jones came to a halt, and, -pointing downward, exclaimed: - -“Look there! Did you ever see anything to beat that?” - -The swamp explorers followed the direction his finger pointed, and -beheld a truly marvelous sight. - -Beneath them was a rift of many feet in length, and in the sides, at -irregular intervals, were small apertures resembling the portholes of a -war ship, through which, ever and anon, came puffs of flame and smoke. - -To look at the scene in a certain way, one could almost imagine that a -pair of immense ironclads were engaged in battle. - -But no noise, beyond a fizzing sound, could be heard when the puffs -came. - -Through the center of the rift, or ravine, as it might properly be -called, a stream of water flowed, and this glittered and flashed in all -the colors of the rainbow as the lurid streaks of flame belched over it. - -On either side the walls sloped down in the form of a very steep hill, -passing directly over the portholes from which the puffs of flame came. - -“So that’s what you call the Devil’s Kingdom, is it?” remarked the -professor, addressing Jones. - -“Yes; that is the name Señor de Amilo gave it,” was the reply. - -“Well, I’ll be ding-wizzened, if it ain’t a good name for it!” -exclaimed Haypole, shrugging his shoulders. “Now, if ther old boy was -ter come out of one of them streams of fire, an’ walk up an’ down ther -middle of that stream, with a pitchfork over his shoulder, ther scene -would be complete.” - -“Great Scott!” cried Dick and Leo in a breath; “there he is, now!” - -Ejaculations of surprise went up from all hands, as with distended eyes -they saw a log go shooting down the stream with a figure clinging to it. - -“That’s Philander Owens, or I’m a sinner!” exclaimed the Yankee. - -“That’s so,” said Leo, taking a step forward to get a better view of -the startling scene. - -As he did so he stepped upon a small stone, which, rolling under his -foot, caused him to slip and lose his balance. - -The next instant he went shooting down the smooth decline with the -velocity of the wind! - - - - -CHAPTER X. IN THE BOWELS OF THE EARTH. - - -When Leo Malvern felt himself sliding down the slippery wall of rock he -closed his eyes and uttered a silent prayer, thinking that all was up -with him. - -In vain he strove to seize upon something to stay his progress; there -was naught but the smooth surface, and his speed kept on increasing. - -Luckily he was sliding feet foremost, and had it not been for the fact -that death stared him in the face, he would almost have imagined that -he was coasting down an icy hill without a sled. - -He had a recollection of hearing a cry of horror escape the lips of his -friends, and then nothing save the roaring sound of the belching flames -below him reached his ears. - -Leo was but a few seconds in making the descent, and yet it seemed to -be as many hours to him. - -Just as he slid over the edge of the decline there came a puff of smoke -and flame which completely enveloped his form and screened him from the -view of his companions above. Blinded and scorching from the heat, he -fell, with a splash, into the cooling waters of the rushing stream. - -When he found that he was not dead, nor yet materially injured, he made -a mighty effort and struggled to the surface. - -He found he could keep his head above the water with little or no -difficulty, and with a feeling of relief he endeavored to look ahead -and see whither he was being carried by the rushing stream. - -Puff! puff! The terrible cross fire of flame and smoke kept shooting -over him a few feet above his head, making it one of the most fearful -experiences he had ever undergone. - -“My God!” thought the boy, “will I ever get out of this alive?” - -But on swept the rushing current, and on went Leo, while the fire and -flame roared over his head, ever and anon scorching his defenseless -face. - -But suddenly the flashes of fire ceased as if by magic, and all was in -darkness. - -The stream flowed through a tunnel, and it was this that the boy had -reached. - -Whizz! whirr! Away he sped, expecting every moment to strike upon a -sharp rock and be dashed to pieces. - -But no such thing occurred. Scarcely more than a minute had elapsed -before he again suddenly whirled into the light. - -Leo was now nearly exhausted from his frantic efforts to reach the -shore, and it was fast telling upon him now. - -The continual splashing of the water upon his face made it difficult -for him to breathe, and he felt soon that he must give up. - -But he made one more mighty effort and half arose in the water to see -what sort of a place he had entered. - -He noticed that the stream had widened considerably, and that there -were no more signs of any fire. - -A few seconds later he heard a dull, roaring sound, which caused him to -turn a shade paler. - -A rapids was close at hand! - -Of this Leo felt certain. He had often before heard the noise made by -the falling of a large body of water. - -Although the stream was quite wide at this point it was running like a -mill race. - -Nearer and nearer the sound of the roaring waters came to the helpless -boy, and his last hopes sunk. - -What chance of life had he in being washed over a falls, at the bottom -of which, in all probability, was an endless amount of sharp, jagged -rocks, as is invariably the case? - -Folding his arms, Leo threw himself upon his back, and allowed himself -to float along at the mercy of the powerful current. - -The roaring sound now became deafening, and he felt that the end was -near. - -But stay! The sharp bark of a dog is heard, and there is a splash close -at hand. - -Half a minute later a pair of jaws close upon the collar of Leo’s coat, -and he comes to a standstill with a sudden jerk. - -What had happened now? was the thought that entered his brain as he -opened his eyes. - -A dog had him gripped firmly by the collar, and both were being towed -slowly toward the left bank of the stream. - -As soon as Leo became aware of this he threw himself over, and caught -hold of the rope, which was secured about the intelligent animal’s -neck, thus lessening the strain upon him. - -A cry of satisfaction went up from some one on the shore as this action -was perceived, and both boy and dog were towed faster through the -rushing water. - -Two minutes more, and Leo felt his feet strike the bottom. - -It was then but the work of a moment for his preserver to pull him -ashore. - -Leo was so exhausted that he fell to the ground in a semi-unconscious -state. - -It was several minutes before he recovered himself, and when he did so -his first thought was to see who it was that had thus saved him in the -nick of time. - -A man stood before him, patting a huge mastiff on the head, and the -young fellow could but give a start of surprise when he saw that it was -Reginald Lacy, the man whose life was sought by Philander Owens. - -“So you have recovered, young fellow?” said Lacy, as he coiled the rope -which had been attached to the dog’s neck. - -“Yes,” returned Leo, rising to his feet, “and I thank you a thousand -times for saving my life!” - -“Don’t mention it. I could not stand by and see a man whom I had -nothing against go over the falls, and be dashed to pieces on the rocks -below. Had you been my enemy, I would not have raised a hand to help -you.” - -Then the thought struck the young swamp explorer that Philander Owens, -clinging to a log, had preceded him down the turbulent stream but a -minute before. Had Reginald Lacy stood upon the shore and watched him -go whirling to his death? - -As he looked at the man and saw the satisfied expression that gleamed -from his eyes, he made up his mind that such indeed was the case. - -“That is a splendid dog you have,” remarked Leo. “Had it not been for -him all would have been up with me.” - -“Yes,” assented Lacy. “There are few better dogs than Jupiter. He is -the best friend I have got in the whole world.” - -As he spoke a far-away look came into his eyes, and his lips twitched -nervously. - -“How did you get away down here, anyhow?” asked Leo. - -“Through a network of passages. I was pursued, as you know, by a man -who desired to take my life; but he will never do it now.” - -“Why, is he dead?” - -Lacy gave a start. - -“Who said he was dead?” he asked. - -“Oh! no one. I only thought as much. I saw him go rushing down the -stream a few minutes ago. That was the cause of my falling into it.” - -“Well, if he is dead I didn’t kill him,” was the vague reply. - -“Let us find our way back to the village,” suggested Leo. - -“Do you think I will not be harmed if I go there?” - -“I am sure you will not.” - -“All right; I’ll go, that is, if I can find the way.” - -“Why, don’t you think you can lead the way back over the same route you -came?” - -An anxious expression came over the boy’s face as he asked the question. - -“I don’t know for sure. I came in such a hurry, being pursued by a -human sleuthhound as I was. But I ought to be able to find the way -without much trouble. Anyhow, we will try. If I can’t, probably Jupiter -can. Come--we may as well start at once.” - -But here an unforeseen obstacle presented itself. - -The opening of this passage, which ran upward in a steep ascent, was -very small--not over four feet in diameter. - -They had not gone into this more than a dozen feet before they came to -a halt, and saw that they could go no further. - -A monster bowlder of iron stone had slipped or been pushed into the -passage from above, and it would have taken at least a score of men to -remove it. - -“Some of my hated enemy’s work,” said Lacy, as he played with his beard -nervously. “This is as far as he followed me. He must have pushed this -bowlder from above and then went back and fallen into the stream. Well, -we must find some other way of getting out, or else we can stay here in -this wonderful underground place and starve!” - - - - -CHAPTER XI. AZURMA’S SEARCH. - - -Dick Vincey gave an agonizing cry as he saw his cousin disappear in the -flame and smoke below them. - -“He’s lost--he’s lost!” he almost wailed. “What will his parents say -when I return without him?” - -“It’s too bad,” said Martin Haypole, consolingly, “but I wouldn’t take -on so much, if I was you. You know none of us won’t ever git back ter -home, anyway--we have took our oaths that we won’t never leave this -dod-rotted country.” - -“Come,” remarked the professor, “let us get away from this place. Leo -is dead long before this--no earthly power could save him.” - -“You are right,” assented Andrew Jones. “I am sorry, but it can’t be -helped.” - -“There is a possibility of his having passed through the flame and -smoke alive,” said De Amilo, the Spaniard; “but the rushing stream--if -he is not drowned in that, he will be carried over a falls a few -hunderd yards further down, and be dashed to pieces on the rocks.” - -No one in the party had the least doubt but that Leo Malvern was dead, -and with a feeling of sorrow they turned from the spot and started for -the village. - -“May de good Lor’ save him!” whined Lucky, the darky, wringing his -hands. “Massa Leo was de bestest friend dis poor darky eber had, an’ -now him done gone an’ got killed. Oh, why did us eber come to de -Eberglades, anyhow?” - -“It is my fault,” said Prof. Easy; “I had no business to induce him to -accompany me on my exploring tour. We have made many discoveries, but -this fearful accident spoils all the pleasure there is in it.” - -“I don’t blame you, professor,” returned Dick. “It was our own free -wills that brought both Leo and myself to the Land of Hez. Say no more -about it, please.” - -As soon as the village was reached, Dick at once apprised Queen Olive -of what had happened. - -She sympathized with him, and tried to comfort him, at the same time -saying: - -“There is a possibility that your cousin is not dead. If that is the -case, there is but one who could seek him out in the earth’s bowels and -find him.” - -“Who is that one?” asked Dick, his hopes arising. - -“Azurma,” was the reply. “She has claimed him for her husband, and if -sent to look for him, she would never come back without him.” - -“Send her, then.” - -“There will be no need of me sending her. When she hears what has -happened she will start at once on her own hook. She has been unable to -see Leo since she left him in the dark cavern, the reason being that -I ordered her not to do so, in punishment for leading you and your -companions from the magic chamber.” - -The queen blew a tiny whistle, and a servant appeared. - -“Send Azurma here,” said she, in Spanish. - -The servant bowed and retired, and a few minutes later the beautiful -Hez girl appeared. - -“What is it, O queen?” she asked. “Can I now be permitted to see my -future lord and master?” - -“You can; but you must first seek him out. He is lost, having fallen -into the stream that flows through the Devil’s Kingdom. You are at -liberty to go where you please in the Land of Hez.” - -An expression of gratefulness, intermingled with fear, came over the -girl’s face, and then, without noticing Dick in the least, she bowed -and retired. - -The brave girl plodded on her way until she came to the point where the -four passages met, and here she came to a pause. - -“He went down the stream that flows through the Devil’s Kingdom,” she -murmured, “and so must I, if I would find him. If he perished, then so -shall I! I have said it, and my word shall not be broken!” - -Then with an expression of determination upon her face, she started -down the passage. - -She only stopped for a moment to view the scene that had seemed such a -wonder to our friends, and then started off at right angles, with an -idea of picking her way to the shores of the stream below, beyond the -smoke and fire. - -That Azurma knew what she was doing was plainly evident, for after a -tedious descent of probably a mile, she came to the point she desired -to reach. - -The roaring of the flames was behind her, and the swiftly rushing tide -was within a few feet of her on the right. - -Eagerly she scanned the shores on either side of the subterranean -stream for a sign of Leo Malvern. - -But not the least trace of him could she see. - -But Azurma had not given up all hope yet. - -With a resolute air she started along the shore in the direction the -water flowed. - -She now could hear the roaring of the water as it dashed over the -falls, and her face paled. - -Had the one she loved been swept over this? - -The thought was a sickening one to her, and for a moment she tottered -and almost fell to the ground. - -Just then the girl caught sight of a number of footprints in the sand. - -In a moment she was kneeling upon the ground examining them. - -As soon as she saw that they were not made by her own people, a cry of -joy escaped her lips. - -As the reader has already surmised, they were the footprints of Leo -Malvern and Reginald Lacy. - -Full of hope now, that her mission would prove successful, Azurma -followed the tracks. - -She reached the mouth of the passage and was just about to enter it -when a warning hiss told her that there was danger ahead. - -The girl drew back with a half-smothered cry of alarm. - -“The picuasus!” she cried, in her own tongue. “Oh! what shall I do now?” - -She hastily withdrew from the mouth of the passage and looked about for -a safe place of retreat. - -As she did so an immense turtle appeared through the opening, and -thrusting a horrible-looking head from its shell, peered around to find -the one who had disturbed it. - -The moment the creature’s beadlike eyes rested upon Azurma a -transformation took place. - -From the appearance of a huge turtle, it suddenly changed to a spider -of the most gigantic proportions. - -Long legs stretched out in every direction, and it began walking toward -the poor girl, with its body at least two feet from the ground. - -Azurma stood as though petrified, her face the color of ashes. - -With rapid strides the many-legged creature neared her. - -When it had approached to within ten feet of her she seemed to regain -her senses. - -Uttering a wild shriek, she started to flee from the spot with all her -might. - -An ominous hiss came from the picuasus, as Azurma called it, and the -horrible thing increased its speed. - -Straight for the river the girl ran, and it was evident that rather -than be torn to pieces by the underground denizen she would throw -herself into the rushing water. - -When within ten yards of the water’s edge Azurma stumbled and fell, and -the next instant the picuasus stretched forth its long tentacles to -seize her. - -But they did not reach. At that moment the report of a rifle rang out, -and it tumbled to the ground in a heap. - -Azurma was saved! - - - - -CHAPTER XII. AZURMA FINDS LEO. - - -Reginald Lacy sank to the ground in a dejected manner when he found -that the mouth of the passage was blocked. - -“We can’t get out,” he said, hoarsely. “We may as well make up our -minds that we have got to starve to death!” - -“Brace up!” exclaimed Leo. “Never give up until you are sure that you -are lost. It was only a short time ago that I was certain that I was -rushing to my death. But I was saved, and that has taught me a lesson. -I will not give up now until I feel the last breath leaving my body.” - -The boy’s words seemed to imbue the man with a new hope. - -He struggled to his feet again and patted his faithful dog on the head. - -“If I only had something to eat,” he said, “there might be a chance. I -am very hungry, and so is Jupiter.” - -“Let us find something to eat.” - -“Where?” - -“Around here, somewhere. There might be living creatures about; we have -not searched, you know.” - -“That’s so; I never gave it a thought before. Lead on and take my -rifle; maybe you will be able to shoot something.” - -Leo took the weapon and saw that it was loaded with but four cartridges. - -That was the only firearm between the two, Leo having lost his when he -tumbled down the rocky decline in the Devil’s Kingdom. - -“We have only got four shots to depend on,” said the boy, motioning -Lacy to follow him; “but if I have occasion to use them I’ll make every -one tell.” - -His companion nodded, and the two started back toward the place they -had come from. - -In a few minutes they reached the shore and began looking about them -for some signs of a creature that might do to eat. - -A couple of hundred yards to the right was a group of rocks, which -looked as though it might possibly contain the lair of a wild beast of -some sort. - -Toward this Leo directed his steps, Lacy following. - -They searched about the place for over half an hour, but not a living -thing could they come across. - -Again they sat down, Lacy being very dejected. - -The dog, who had been nosing about considerably, suddenly started off -at a quick bound, at the same time uttering a short bark. - -“He has struck the trail of something!” exclaimed Reginald Lacy, -springing to his feet as quickly as his feeble condition would allow -him. - -“Let us follow him,” says Leo. - -Away they went after Jupiter, in the hopes that he was about to start -up some game. - -They had no sooner entered a small passage between two clefts of rock -than they were startled by hearing a wild scream. - -“Great God!” exclaimed Lacy. “What is that?” - -“It sounds to me like the cry of a female in distress,” replied his -young companion, turning about and starting hurriedly in the direction -the scream came from. - -In a few seconds Leo came in sight of Azurma, with the horrible -picuasus pursuing her. - -Again a wild scream left the girl’s lips, and though the distance was -rather great, the boy instantly concluded to risk a shot. - -He knew full well if he missed the girl was lost, and that nerved him -to do his best. - -He placed his rifle to his shoulder, and, taking a quick aim, pulled -the trigger. - -Crack! - -As the report rung out the picuasus fell, the bullet having pierced one -of its eyes. - -As brave as she was, Azurma had swooned, and as soon as he reached the -spot, Leo set about to bring her to. - -He soon accomplished this, and by the time Reginald Lacy reached the -spot she was sitting up clasping her preserver by the hands and gazing -into his eyes in a mute expression of joy. - -“I have found you, O my future lord and master!” she said, and then she -did not speak again for fully a minute. - -Reginald Lacy stood staring at her like one in a dream. At length he -spoke. - -“How did you get here, miss?” he asked. “Can you lead us to a place -where we can get something to eat?” - -“Are you hungry?” said Azurma, rising to her feet and unslinging the -bag from her shoulder. “If you are, eat.” - -Lacy needed no second invitation. - -He seized the food with a cry of joy and began devouring it ravenously. - -“God bless you, my girl!” he exclaimed, hoarsely; “you have saved my -life. But my dog must have something, too. I will call him, and share -with him.” - -He gave a long whistle, and in a few moments Jupiter came rushing from -a pile of rocks with the speed of an antelope. - -The scent he had taken had proved but a myth, after all, and the dog, -like his master, being very hungry, soon forgot all about it. - -He scarcely noticed the dead picuasus, but at once eagerly swallowed -the food Lacy gave him. - -“Now, Azurma,” said Leo, “can you take us back to the village?” - -“I can, and will at once, O my----” - -“Hold on,” interrupted the boy. “Call me Leo; don’t use any more -high-fangled titles--I don’t like it.” - -“Be it as you say, then, Leo. Whenever you are ready, I will conduct -you safely to your friends and mine.” - -Then, acting on Azurma’s advice, he seized her by the hand and started -with all speed for the stream, Lacy and the dog following close behind. - -Once there, Leo turned to look for Reginald Lacy and the dog. - -A startling scene met his gaze. - -Lacy had ventured too far out and the current had carried him off his -feet. - -Jupiter had seized him by the collar and was endeavoring to swim ashore -with him. - -“Help!” exclaimed Lacy, doing his best to stem the tide. - -“Let the dog swim ashore with the rope--that is your only hope!” -exclaimed the boy, rushing into the water as far as he dared. - -But this Jupiter could not be made to do. He was bent on saving the -life of his master, but he was going to do it in his own way. - -Further and further the man and dog were sucked from the shore, in -spite of the superhuman efforts they made. - -Leo was completely dismayed. The very ones who had saved his life were -now going to their own death over the falls. - -He had no rope to throw to them, and could but stand upon the bank and -witness it. - -Faster and faster the struggling man and dog were carried, and nearer -and nearer they were whirled to the falls. - -Azurma had turned her back upon the scene, but a strange fascination -seemed to hold Leo’s eyes upon the doomed man and his faithful dog. - -The next moment they went whirling over the cataract with a mighty rush. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII. BALLOTING FOR HUSBANDS. - - -Completely unnerved at the sight, Leo turned from the spot. - -“Come, Azurma,” said he, “we will go back to the village.” - -“Yes, Leo,” was the reply; “nothing could save the man and dog from -death. Their lifeless bodies are floating in the pool at the foot of -the falls by this time.” - -For fear that another picuasus might show up, they hurriedly left the -spot. - -Azurma led the way back over the same route by which they had come, and -in due time they arrived at the village, without further accidents. - -The girl clasped Leo lovingly by the arm when they neared the palace, -and Dick and Martin Haypole, who saw them coming, flung their caps in -the air and uttered a cheer that brought out almost every soul in the -village. - -“Well, I’ll be everlasting ding-wizzened if ther boy isn’t alive an’ -well as any of us! An’ ter think that he passed through both fire -an’ water without gettin’ a scratch! ’Tain’t fer him to die in this -country--that’s certain.” - -And Dick! The boy could hardly express his joy at finding his cousin -alive. - -Queen Olive, who could not help hearing the commotion, came outside and -nodded when she saw what caused it, as though she was well satisfied -with Azurma’s success. - -“I knew that if he was alive she would find him,” said she to Dick. - -“All that I can say is that I am glad of it,” was the reply. - -“Azurma is a very brave girl,” said Leo. “Had it not been for her I -would never have found my way to this place again. I don’t know how I -shall ever repay her.” - -“Oh, that is easy,” returned Azurma; “promise to become my lord and -master when the proper time arrives.” - -The queen then spoke, informing Leo what the custom of Hez was, -concluding with: - -“I have just been visited by a committee of unmarried ladies, who -demand that they shall have an opportunity of drawing lots for each -of you. It is the custom, and we must adhere to it. I have appointed -to-morrow morning for the drawing to take place. You will all remember -this, and be at the palace an hour after sunrise.” - -With these words she left our friends, taking Azurma with her. - -The next morning, at the appointed time, Leo, Dick, Prof. Easy, Martin -Haypole and Lucky made their way to the abode of the queen. - -At least half a hundred girls and middle-aged women were there, and it -was with great difficulty that our friends managed to squeeze their way -in. - -More than one pair of eyes cast a bewitching glance at them as they -passed, and Lucky and the Yankee grinned in a wholesale manner. - -Queen Olive was at the further end of the long hall through the center -of the building, and Dick noticed that her face wore an anxious look. - -When all had assembled and the utmost quiet reigned, she arose and -addressed the audience in Spanish. - -“Women of Hez,” said she, “we have assembled here this morning, -according to our ancient custom, to choose five husbands. Our law is -that no woman shall ever marry, unless her husband be a stranger from -the outside world. That is the way our race was founded, and is the -reason why we are so few in number. But the custom must be kept up. -There are fifty-one of us here, and there are but five strangers. -Forty-six must be disappointed. As Queen of Hez, I shall choose one of -the five without going into the form of drawing lots.” - -A slight murmur of disapproval arose from the assemblage as these words -rang out. - -Queen Olive evidently expected this, for, with flashing eyes, she -exclaimed: - -“Silence! I am the ruler of this land, and my word is law.” - -Then motioning to Dick to step forward, she went on: - -“This is the man I have chosen for my husband; he loves me and I love -him.” - -Nothing abashed, Dick took his place beside the beautiful creature. - -But that the girls were anything but satisfied was plainly apparent. -They thought that in a case of this kind the queen should place herself -upon an equal footing with them, and take her chances. - -But Queen Olive thought differently, and that settled it, for the time -being, anyhow. - -As soon as her majesty ceased speaking, Azurma pushed her way through -the crowd and made an eloquent address, relating how she had saved Leo -from a death of starvation, winding up with a strong argument that he -should be given to her. - -But the Hez beauties would not listen to this, and so Azurma’s appeal -was ruled down. - -At Queen Olive’s order, a small, square box was brought forth, which -contained a number of small pieces of coal-like substance, and one -small bit of crystal of the same size and weight. - -Then every female present was securely blindfolded and directed to step -forward, one at a time, and pick out one of the pieces. - -The one who was fortunate enough to get hold of the bit of crystal was -the one to have the husband. - -In case that no one got hold of the crystal, the queen had the power to -give him to whoever she saw fit. - -Leo fervently desired that this might be the case, for he felt that if -he was compelled to become engaged to any of the females present he -would rather it would be Azurma, for the simple reason that she wanted -him, and he owed her a debt of gratitude for coming to hunt him up. - -When everything was in readiness, the women stepped forward to draw the -pieces from the box. - -It was quite interesting, and our friends watched the result with bated -breath. - -As fast as one selected, the bandage was removed from her eyes and she -retired to the other end of the hall. - -Azurma was the fifth one to draw, and when a black ballot was disclosed -to her view, she uttered a cry of dismay, and staggered blindly from -the spot. - -The next to step forward was a girl as young and fully as beautiful as -she. - -As she lifted the ballot from the box a murmur went up from the -assemblage. - -She held the piece of crystal in her hand! - -With an expression of triumph upon her beautiful face, she held out her -arms and approached Leo. - -But she never reached him. A figure bounded forward with the swiftness -of an enraged panther; a blade flashed in the air, and the would-be -bride fell to the stone floor, the blood spurting from a wound in her -left side. - -It was Azurma who had committed the deed, and with flashing eyes and -heaving breast she drew herself to her full height. - -“Thus I have broken the laws of Hez!” she exclaimed, in a dramatic -tone. “Do with me what you will, O queen!” - -It had all happened so quickly that our friends were utterly astounded, -and before they could fully comprehend what had taken place, Azurma was -seized and bound, and conducted from the building. - -And the girl who had proven so unfortunate in picking out the -crystal--she never spoke again. The blade had severed her heart in -twain, and the beautiful Azurma was a murderess! - -Leo turned sick at heart when he realized that he was the cause of the -tragedy, and he leaned against the wall in a dazed condition. - -“Remove the body!” - -It was Queen Olive who spoke. - -Her command was instantly obeyed, and then, as though nothing had -happened, the ballots were shaken about in the box, and it was -announced that it would be decided who should have Martin Haypole. - -“Gosh!” exclaimed the Yankee; “I hope no one don’t git killed on my -account! I’ll be satisfied with any of ther younger gals!” - -This time nearly everyone had a chance at the box before the crystal -was drawn, and then it resulted in favor of a buxom Hez maiden of fair -appearance and uncertain age. - -“Well, I rather guess you’ll do,” observed Haypole, as he shook hands -with her, “though I’ll be ding-wizzened if I don’t wish it had been one -of ther younger ones. Howsumever, beggars mustn’t be choosers, an’, -though I ain’t exactly been a-beggin’ for a wife, I’ll take yer when -ther times comes, an’ try an’ be satisfied.” - -The next victim was the professor, and, with his face wreathed in -smiles, he waited the result. - -Almost the first one to draw was the fortunate one, and she being one -of the beauties of the country, the professor nearly swallowed his -false teeth, so broad was his smile of satisfaction. - -“Golly!” said Lucky, when he was ordered to step forth for inspection; -“I declar’ ter goodness, if dey ain’t treatin’ dis chile well in dis -yer country! Furst dey make him all white, wif de excepshun of his -face, which am a yaller color, an den dey present him wif a wife! Well, -I’s’ll be satisfied wif any ob dem.” - -In a few minutes it was all settled, and the winner of the prize, -who was old enough to be the darky’s mother, seemed to be perfectly -satisfied. - -“Now,” said the queen, “all who have been chosen as husbands will -leave, except the one who lost his bride at the hand of Azurma. Another -ballot must be taken for him.” - -Even Dick was forced to retire with the others, and that left Leo the -only male in the crowd. - -The more the young fellow thought over what had just occurred the -stronger became his determination that he would allow the farce, as he -considered it, to go no further. - -The part he had already played had been quite enough for him, and he -made up his mind that if Azurma could not have him, no one else should. - -Just as the queen was getting the box ready, he stepped forward and -exclaimed: - -“Stop! I have had enough of this. I will allow no further drawing for -me, as I have made up my mind not to marry at all!” - - - - -CHAPTER XIV. AZURMA SUFFERS THE PENALTY OF HER CRIME. - - -The next morning the swamp explorers were up bright and early. - -They had been invited to be present at the execution of the murderess, -Azurma, and though none of them were bloodthirsty enough to long for -such sights, the novelty of the thing caused them to make up their -minds to see it out. - -That Leo was very much put out about the affair was certain. He -considered that he was the direct cause of the whole trouble, and while -the fair girl deserved punishment for her rash and bloody act, he made -up his mind that a jury in any civilized portion of the world would -hardly find her guilty of murder in the first degree. She might receive -a sentence of imprisonment for life, and probably not as bad as that. - -He concluded to speak to the queen about it, and got Dick to accompany -him to the palace just before the procession was ready to start for the -place of execution. - -She granted him an audience readily enough, but would not listen to -his appeal that she might be a little more lenient with Azurma. - -“No,” said she, with a decided shake of her head; “she must die as -I have ordered. I cannot; nor would not if I could, countermand my -orders. We are ready to start now, tell the rest of your companions to -fall in line, and be sure to go with us to see the vile murderess take -her death ride into the Devil’s Kingdom!” - -There was no getting over it, so our friends promptly fell into line -with nearly the entire population of Hez. - -Azurma was then brought forth by two men, and she cast a look of -defiance at Queen Olive and the rest of the women. - -The word was given, and the procession filed away, the swamp explorers -keeping near the doomed girl, and marveling at the fortitude she -possessed. - -Torches were lighted, and they passed through the dark passage into the -magic chamber. - -Here Azurma turned her gaze upon Leo, and said: - -“It was in this place that I first met you, my Leo. Then I thought you -would be mine, but they robbed me of you. But I promise, that though -they kill me, I will meet you in another world, and then we will be -happy. This I swear!” - -At this point the girl was hustled on, and deeply impressed by her -words, Leo and his companions followed with the crowd. - -In a short time the spot that overlooked the place dubbed the Devil’s -Kingdom was reached, and the party came to a halt. - -A shudder came over Azurma as she surveyed the horrible place below, -but in an instant she had regained her composure and was as calm as -ever. - -The puffs of fire and smoke roared and hissed below them, and the -stream which flowed through the place seemed to rush along with unusual -speed. - -“I am ready to suffer the penalty of my crime, O queen! It is sweet to -die for those we love!” - -It was the doomed girl that spoke, and as she turned her eyes upon the -assemblage her face looked more beautiful than ever. - -“If you have anything to say, out with it at once,” said the queen. -“According to our ancient laws you must die, and our laws must not be -broken.” - -“I will say this much,” replied Azurma, advancing to the very edge of -the steep, rocky slant: “The women of Hez have robbed me of the one I -love, and now, as I stand upon the very brink of death, I set my curse -upon all who took part in it. And, furthermore, I do swear that I will -return from the undiscovered country into which I am now to be hurled, -and heap destruction upon all Hez. This I promise you; and if I do -leave this country to find a haven of rest in another more beautiful -one--as I firmly believe I shall--I will do my best to get the people -of that country to follow me to Hez and aid me in accomplishing my -revenge.” - -She paused for a moment and looked keenly around to see the effect of -her words. - -She was evidently satisfied, for a smile broke over her beautiful face. - -Then, directing her gaze upon Leo, her lips parted. - -“Farewell, my Leo; forget not what I said in the magic chamber.” - -The next instant, to the astonishment of all hands, she turned and -sprang over the verge of the awful place and went gliding toward the -flame and smoke below! - -She had cheated the executioners from throwing her into the Devil’s -Kingdom by committing the deed herself. - -Down--down the horrible descent she glided until the lurid flames hid -her from view, and then, with a mighty splash, the beautiful murderess -plunged into the rushing stream. - -A shudder crept over everyone in the party, and one and all they turned -their heads. - -For fully a minute a deep silence reigned. - -At length it was broken by Queen Olive. - -“Come,” said she, in a strange, unnatural tone, “let’s go back.” - -Everybody seemed to be willing, so they started at once. - -As soon as they arrived at the village, our friends sought the -seclusion of their own dwelling to talk over the startling events that -had so recently occurred. - -About an hour after darkness set in the younger population of Hez -began moving toward the magic chamber, and among them were Dick, the -professor, Haypole and Lucky. - -Each of these escorted the fair one to whom he had been engaged, and -the Yankee and the transformed darky presented an amusing spectacle as -they made their way along in the procession. - -Dick was more or less elated at being at the head of the line with the -beautiful queen at his side, and for the time being he forgot all about -Leo. - -When they reached the magic chamber, he found it was lighted by a -number of brightly burning torches, stuck in niches in the rocky walls. - -Almost as soon as he and Queen Olive entered a strain of music struck -up, he knew not from where, and he found his partner and himself -leading a fantastic, weird march. - -Back and forth, through the roomy cavern, they made their way, the boy -doing as the queen directed him. - -At length, after about ten minutes of this sort of thing, the music -suddenly ceased and everybody came to a halt. - -Then it again struck up, and the opening dance began. - -It was very similar to the old-fashioned Virginia reel, and our friends -had little or no difficulty in going through the figures. - -Prof. Easy seemed to be in his seventh heaven. - -He danced about like a wild man of the woods, and laughed like a child -in possession of a new toy. - -And Martin Haypole. He swung his long legs around regardless of any -mischief he might do, and forgot all the cares and troubles of his life. - -Lucky was probably the most nimble-footed male on the floor, and he -soon laid all the rest in the shade. - -When the first dance came to an end, Queen Olive informed Dick that a -number of the girls would give the dance of death--the same that our -friends had witnessed on their arrival in Hez. - -This, she informed him, was always indulged in by those who were not -fortunate enough to have a partner for life, or a chance of soon having -one, at every occasion like this. - -Now that they knew what was coming, the four were anxious to see it, -and they took seats with those who were not to participate in it on the -stone floor of the cavern. - -It was but a repetition of what they had seen before, but it was -entrancing, for all that. - -The graceful, undulating movements of the gaudily bedecked creatures -seemed to move as if by a strange mechanism, and when their skeleton -partners dropped down from above, the scene was complete. - -As before, when the thing wound up, a crowd of figures resembling -animals rushed in and seized the girls, and the skeletons disappeared. - -At the same instant the lights went out and all was in total darkness. - -This was evidently not on the program, for the audience gave a cry of -alarm, and a number hastened to light up the scene again. When they -had done so it was found that both Dick and the queen had mysteriously -disappeared. - - - - -CHAPTER XV. THE NAZTECS AND THEIR PRISONERS. - - -Reginald Lacy and his faithful dog were swept over the falls with -frightful velocity. - -Jupiter still gripped his master by the collar, and it was evident that -he meant to hang on until death parted them. - -Down the foaming cataract they were carried, and the terror of his -dreadful situation caused Lacy to lose possession of his faculties. - -When he came to again he found himself lying upon a strip of sand with -his feet in the water. - -Jupiter sat before him, patiently waiting for his master to come to -life and speak to him. - -At first the man thought that he must certainly be injured in some way, -but a single effort on his part showed him that he was not. - -He rose to his feet but very little the worse for his journey over the -rapids, and patted the dog’s head. - -A slight noise behind him caused him to turn. The next instant a dozen -men sprang upon him and bore him to the ground. - -Jupiter, the dog, endeavored to render his master some assistance, but -a blow from a heavy club stretched the animal senseless on a slab of -rock. - -Then Lacy’s hands were securely bound behind him, and his captors, who -were a queer-looking set, raised him to his feet. - -They began talking rapidly in some unknown tongue, and at length -decided to take their prisoner down the decline to the cave below. - -Lacy did not offer the least resistance, but with a strange, hunted -look in his eyes he walked along with his captors. - -They took him to a cavern where there were a number of strange men -already assembled, and where Lacy observed another prisoner lying on -the ground, bound hand and foot. - -After a short consultation, a couple of men walked over to the -prostrate man and liberated him, save untying his hands. - -Even then the man did not look up, but kept his eyes fixed on the -ground in a sullen manner. - -But Reginald Lacy was gazing at him with a look of fear upon his face. - -It was his enemy, Philander Owens! - -An order was given, and both prisoners were marched to the other end of -the cave, where an opening was visible. - -Through this went the inhabitants of the underground world, leading -their prisoners with them. - -The strange inhabitants of the place kept on with their prisoners until -they reached a massive building of a purple color, which was situated -at the end of the single street contained in the city--if city it could -be called. - -Here they came to a halt. - -Then, for the first time, the eyes of Owens rested upon his fellow -captive, and such a look of hate darted from them! - -Lacy quailed before him, and in a husky voice said: - -“Aren’t you satisfied yet? Or do you still hate me as much as ever?” - -“Just as much!” was the reply, in a bitter voice. “Why shouldn’t I? But -never mind--my hour of vengeance will yet come!” - -“Death stares us both in the face,” said Lacy, in a calmer tone. “Why -not let bygones be bygones?” - -“What! after I went to the expense to purchase a balloon to hunt you -down after you had taken to the Everglades? Why, you vile hound! I have -spent a fortune, almost, for the purpose of hunting you down. Never! If -I ever hated you, I do now!” - -“As you will,” returned Lacy, becoming more cool every moment. “But -remember, we are both on an equal footing now.” - -“I would soon show you if we were both free!” exclaimed Owens, hotly. - -As if he were understood, a richly decked personage suddenly appeared -in the doorway of the purple-hued building and spoke a few words. - -To the surprise and joy of Owens, his hands were untied. - -Then Lacy was treated in a like manner. The man, who was evidently the -king, was just about to make an address to his people in regard to the -two strangers from an unknown land, when a startling thing occurred. - -Owens made a sudden leap and seized Lacy by the throat. - -The men were about of one size and build, and were evenly matched as -far as appearances were. - -Owens was boiling over with rage, while on the contrary his opponent -was perfectly cool and collected. - -Lacy had gripped his foe about the neck, and he strove to throw him -with all his might. - -At the commencement of the sudden encounter between the two men, -the inhabitants of the place were thrown into a state of dumfounded -amazement. - -But at length the king shouted the one word: - -“_Naztec!_” - -“Naztec, Naztec!” came the response from all hands. - -And in the twinkling of an eye the combatants were separated and led -away in different directions. - -Lacy was conducted to a building on the right and placed in a small -room, where two men promptly placed themselves to guard against his -leaving the place. - -“Naztec!” repeated one of the men, and then motioned to Lacy that if he -would remain passive he would not be harmed. - -One of the men pointed to a soft couch in a corner of the room and -motioned him to lie down. - -Then it struck Lacy that he was very tired and sleepy, so he promptly -obeyed. - -In a very short time he was fast asleep. - -It must have been ten or twelve hours before he awakened, and when he -did so he felt greatly refreshed. - -As soon as he arose half a dozen men appeared and conducted him from -the room to the street outside. - -He was walked up and down this for about ten minutes and then returned -to the place whence he came. - -A substantial meal was now set before him, and Lacy ate it in a hearty -manner, all the while wondering why it was that he was receiving such -excellent attention. - -But he was destined to soon learn. - -Philander Owens was used exactly the same in another building not far -away, and he, too, wondered why it was thus and so. - -About twenty-four hours later both ceased to wonder. - -Lacy had risen but an hour before, when he heard the beating of a -tom-tom, or some other outlandish instrument. - -The sum and substance of it was, that the ruler of the place had -arranged for a contest of strength to take place between the two -prisoners. - -He had noticed the savageness with which the men had come together -when they had been brought before him, and he concluded that if they -were fed up a little, and taken care of, they would be able to give a -first-class entertainment to the populace. - -Owens had been captured a few hours before Lacy showed up and attempted -to roll the bowlder down, but he had not been taken before the king -until they both were together. - -At the beating of the tom-tom the people of the place began to gather -at the end of the wide street in front of the purple-hued building, and -Lacy and Owens were each led from the house they had been kept in. - -Owens was clad in a red tunic, while, as has already been stated, Lacy -wore a blue one. - -Both men seemed glad when the king motioned them to settle what -differences they had then and there. One, because he hated the man who -stood before him beyond the depth of conception; and the other, because -he thought it about time that the thing was settled. - -Instead of grappling with each other, the two men began sparring for an -opening. - -At length Lacy planted a stinging blow on his adversary’s nose, causing -the blood to flow freely. - -“Naztec!” yelled the crowd, applauding wildly. - -Stung to madness, Owens made a sudden dive to the left and seized a -knife from the belt of a man standing near. - -With a look of fury in his eyes, he sprang upon Lacy, and raised the -weapon to plunge it in his heart. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI. DICK AND THE QUEEN IN PERIL. - - -It is now about time that the mysterious disappearance of Dick Vincey -and the Queen of Hez was explained. - -The very instant the torches were extinguished in the magic chamber the -two were seized and borne to the earth. - -Before they could cry out, gags were thrust in their mouths, and then -in the confusion that prevailed they were carried rapidly from the spot. - -Dick strove manfully to free himself, but it was useless; a heavy cloth -had been wound tightly around his body, rendering him powerless to use -his arms. - -The pair were carried swiftly along for about half an hour, through -innumerable passages and tunnels, until at length they reached a spot -where it was light. - -But it was not the light made by burning torches--it looked more, to -Dick, as though he was being carried through a street with a plentiful -supply of electric lights in it. - -However, his eyes were gladdened by the light but for a minute or -so. The next instant their captors entered a cave, where all was in -darkness, and came to a halt. - -The two prisoners were deposited upon the hard ground as though they -had been mere bundles of rags, and then those who had brought them -thence took their departure. - -For fully an hour the utmost silence reigned, and then it was suddenly -broken by the sound of approaching footsteps. - -Both Dick and his fair companion were beginning to suffer from their -cramped positions, and they breathed a sigh of relief when they heard -some one coming. - -A moment later a lighted torch came in view, and a dozen Hez maidens -appeared on the scene. - -They were those who had balloted for husbands and who had been -disappointed. - -Dick saw it all now. They were evidently dissatisfied with the queen -choosing him without allowing them a voice in the matter, and they had -now taken the law in their own hands. - -The boy was right. Such was really the case. The twelve maidens who now -stood before them had conspired together and broken the laws of the -Land of Hez. - -They had caused the couple to be brought to this out-of-the-way place -to force Queen Olive to give Dick over to them, and then swear to let -the matter drop forever. - -In case she refused, the two were to be left in the cave to perish, -while the conspirators would go back to the village and circulate the -rumor that their queen, being unable to wait until the two years had -passed, had fled to the outside world with her lover. - -That this story would be believed by the simple Hez people there was -not the least particle of doubt. - -The leader of the twelve maidens was Queen Olive’s younger sister--heir -to the throne! - -It was she who acted as speaker for her companions, and after having -removed the gags from the mouths of the two prisoners, so they would be -able to answer her, she proceeded to inform them of the reason they had -been abducted from the magic chamber. - -“Our plan was well carried out,” said she, “and the twelve here -assembled are the ones that did it. We have rebelled against the -throne, and unless you agree to our terms, you must lie in this cave, -bound as you are, to furnish food for the dreaded picuasus. What is -your answer, my sister?” - -The eyes of the queen flashed with rage that was intense, and for a -moment she could not find words to make a reply. - -But finally she calmed herself and said: - -“My answer is this, base conspirators! I will not agree to your terms, -even though you do leave me here to die, which you dare not do.” - -“Dare not? We will show you. I will give you just five minutes to -consider your reply, and if in that time you do not agree, we will -certainly leave you both here--unless the young man whom you have -chosen for your husband desires to accept one of us, and will take an -oath not to reveal what has happened.” - -“I will not do that!” said Dick, hotly. “Do your worst, you she-fiends; -we will triumph in the end.” - -“Nobly spoken, my brave young lover!” spoke up the queen. “It will be -as you say--we will triumph in the end.” - -There was no reply to this until the five minutes had elapsed, and -then the queen’s sister, with a perfectly immovable face, spoke up. - -“What is your decision?” she asked, coolly. - -“You have it already. Free us immediately, or I give you my word that -every one of you shall suffer the fate of Azurma.” - -There was a ripple of mocking laughter at this, and the leader of the -conspirators went on: - -“Is that your final answer?” - -“It is.” - -“Be it so, then. From this time forward I am the queen of the Land of -Hez. Farewell, my sister. May you and your lover enjoy the agonies of -death you have so freely chosen!” - -This nerved Dick to a feeling of desperation, and he strove to free -himself with all his might. - -But it was utterly useless; the heavy cloth that bound his hands to his -sides was too firmly wound about him. - -Then, too, his legs were secured in the same manner, and he soon found -that he could scarcely even turn over. - -“It is useless,” he said, panting from his exertions. “We have got to -die!” - -“Oh, say not so,” wailed the queen, and she fell back in a faint. - -And Dick! He relaxed his muscles and fell into as comfortable a -position as was possible, and set to thinking over their situation. - -What worried him most was what the queen’s sister had said about them -furnishing a meal for the dreaded picuasus. - -He had heard about those monsters from Leo, and that he and his -beautiful companion were in the limits of the domain of the horrible -turtle spiders he felt certain. - -What if one of them should come prowling that way now? - -The thought was maddening to Dick, and he again strove to free himself. - -But after five minutes of fruitless endeavor he fell back exhausted. - -Soon after this he fell into a troubled sleep, from which he did not -awaken until some hours had elapsed. - -He felt cramped and sore, and soon as the full sense of his situation -came to him, he listened intently. - -But not a sound could be heard, save the regular breathing of the girl -at his side, who was now sleeping peacefully. - -He determined not to disturb her slumber, and so did not attempt to -burst his bonds again. - -The seconds flitted into minutes, and the minutes into hours, and still -there was no change. - -Had it not been for Queen Olive’s regular breathing, Dick would have -thought her dead. - -“Let her sleep,” he thought. “She is now entirely oblivious to our -horrible situation, and if I wake her up, she will only rave and go on -at a great rate.” - -About five minutes later the boy heard a sound which sent a thrill -through his body. - -A faint pit-pat could be heard, which told him that some living -creature was approaching. - -“The picuasus!” he muttered to himself. “Well, it will soon be over.” - -Nearer and nearer the sounds came, and presently the boy’s instinct -told him that the animal, or whatever it was, had halted within a few -feet of him. - -The next moment he felt the cold nose of the creature touching his -face! - - - - -CHAPTER XVII. AZURMA AND THE NAZTECS. - - -Azurma, the beautiful murderess, had jumped upon the rocky slide with -the firm conviction that she was going to her death. - -She held her breath and closed her eyes during the fearful descent. - -When she had passed through the flames and found herself comparatively -uninjured, a sudden hope arose in her breast that she might come out -all right yet. - -This thought no sooner entered her mind than she struck the water with -a splash and sank below its surface. - -Down, down, the girl went, for many feet. - -When she struggled to the surface again she was at least two hundred -yards from the place where she had fallen in. - -Blinded and half choked, she kept her head above the water, and in a -few seconds she was beyond the limits of the roaring fire and smoke. - -The girl did not offer to struggle in the least, but allowed the -merciless current to carry her along at its will. - -This was the wisest thing she could do, for it left her what strength -she possessed to be used later on. - -On she whirled, the current running so strong that she kept on top of -the water without the least effort on her part. - -In a few more seconds the falls will be reached. - -Azurma hears the angry roar of the tide in her ears, and prepares -herself for the worst. - -She lifts her head for a single instant, and sees the foaming crest but -a few yards distant. - -The next minute, with a rush and a roar, she is carried over. - -Contrary to her expectations, she is not dashed to a shapeless mass -upon a bed of jagged rocks, but finds herself struggling in a lake of -comparatively still water. - -Azurma knew how to swim, and, after brushing her long tresses from her -eyes, she drew a long breath and started for the shore, close at hand. - -Faint and exhausted, she reached it, and sank upon the ground in a -semi-unconscious condition. - -She was aroused to her full senses presently by hearing the pattering -made by some animal running toward her. - -In an instant she sprang to her feet. - -A cry of joy escaped her lips. - -Coming toward her was Jupiter, the dog she had seen go over the falls -with his master the day before. - -The animal came directly to her feet and lay down, acting in a very -strange manner. His head was covered plentifully with clotted blood, -showing the girl that he was suffering from a severe wound. - -Lying upon the ground, he looked her in the face and whined in a -piteous manner. - -“Poor dog,” said Azurma. “What has become of your master? Is he dead? -If not, take me to him.” - -She waved her hand for the dog to get up and lead the way. - -He seemed to comprehend her meaning, but acted in a dazed sort of way. - -Running away from her for about fifty yards, he suddenly turned and -made a circle, and then rolled over and over upon the ground. - -Instead of being frightened at these strange actions, Azurma became -interested. - -Instinct told her that something unusual ailed the dog. - -She made up her mind to find out what it was, if possible. - -Quickly making her way to his side, she talked to him in a soothing -manner, and then proceeded to examine the wound on his head. - -A moment’s inspection sufficed to show her that the animal’s skull had -received a fracture, and that a part of the bone was depressed. - -Something told her that if she could lift the piece of bone back to its -place, Jupiter would be all right. - -A needle-like instrument was pinned to the white, gauzy sash about her -waist, and with this she endeavored to do the job. - -Though she knew little or nothing about surgery, she was successful. - -The dog howled piteously during the operation, but did not offer to -prevent her from doing it. - -When it was finished he rolled over on his side and appeared to -fall into a deep sleep. The girl bathed the dog’s wound with her -water-soaked garments, and then seated herself by his side to await -developments. - -It must have been an hour before the dog began to show signs of -awakening, and as soon as he did, Azurma, who had heard Reginald Lacy -call him by name, arose to her feet. - -“Come, Jupiter; show me where your master is.” - -The animal seemed to have fully recovered; he began springing about her -feet, uttering his quick, sharp barks in a joyful manner. - -Then, catching Azurma by the dress, he attempted to pull her along -after him in the direction of the opening where the light came from. - -“I’ll go with you willingly,” said the girl, catching on to the idea -that Lacy was somewhere in that direction. - -Away they went, the faithful dog leading, and ever and anon turning -around to see if Azurma was still following. - -In this manner they soon reached the identical place Lacy had entered -several hours previously. - -Azurma was very much puzzled at her surroundings. She, nor none of -her people, had ever been in that portion of the underground country -before, but she could plainly see the tracks made by Lacy, and -concluded to follow as far as Jupiter chose to lead her. - -Along through the lighted passage they went until they arrived at the -point where Lacy had been pounced upon and captured by the Naztecs when -in the act of hurling the bowlder down upon the defenseless form of his -enemy. - -Azurma’s quick eye told her that a struggle had taken place here, for -she found the shred of a garment, evidently a piece of the shirt Lacy -wore, while upon the ground was a clot of blood. - -But as she could find no more of the latter, she rightly judged that it -had come from the dog. - -A strange light shone in the girl’s eyes as she surveyed her -surroundings. - -“Is it possible that the last words I addressed to the women of Hez -will come true?” she asked herself. “I have escaped death, and am now -in the limits of another country, where people must certainly live, for -they were not animals who carried off the dog’s master and left the -poor creature lying here for dead. I will go down there where it is so -light; Jupiter seems anxious to go, and I will follow.” - -Without any further hesitation she started down the descent, and at -length stood in the cave in which Owens had been lying bound hand and -foot. - -But the place was deserted now, and Azurma followed the dog through the -opening at the other side, and stepped into the single street of the -strange, little city. - -The scene that met the girl’s eyes was so entirely different to what -she had anticipated that for a moment she was completely bewildered. - -But not so with the dog. - -He gave a single bark and dashed away with the speed of the wind toward -the further end of the street, where a large number of people were -congregated. - -It was at this identical moment that the contest of strength between -Reginald Lacy and Philander Owens was about to take place. - -Jupiter reached the spot just as the enraged Owens was about to plunge -the gleaming blade into his master’s heart. - -With a mighty bound the animal sprang upon the would-be assassin and -bore him to the ground. - -Then, but for the interposition of a number of the Naztecs, he would -have literally torn him to pieces. - -As it was, Owens’ shoulder was so badly lacerated by the dog’s teeth -that he had to be carried from the place in a semi-conscious condition. - -Lacy staggered to the side of Jupiter and hugged him as a mother would -her child. - -The Naztecs gazed upon the scene with a look of wonderment in their -eyes. - -True, they had such things as dogs in their country, but none like the -faithful animal who was now before them, and who had saved his master’s -life! - -At a signal from the king, or ruler, of the place, the crowd clapped -their hands in a burst of applause, and then began singing a sort of -chant. - -At this moment Azurma, who had hitherto been unobserved, came upon them. - -Reginald Lacy was one of the first to notice her, and when he did so he -gave a start of surprise. - -She had joined the Naztecs in singing the chant, and appeared to be -perfectly acquainted with it. - -The moment the king laid his eyes upon the newcomer, he made a sudden -signal, and everybody, save Lacy and the girl herself, dropped upon -their knees. - -Azurma seemed as much astonished as Lacy at the proceedings, but she -did not hesitate to shake hands with the man who had preceded her to -the queer country. - -“Do you know these people?” asked Lacy, quickly. - -“No; I never saw nor heard of them before.” - -“Do you understand their language?” - -“I know the chant they were singing. It was learned to the people of -Hez by Roderique de Amilo, the founder of the race.” - -“Oh!” exclaimed the man, brightening up; “if that is the case, you can, -most likely, make yourself understood to them. Are you acquainted with -the language in which the chant is sung?” - -“I am.” - -“Then advance to that man over there and ask him who and what they are, -and what they are going to do with us.” - -He pointed to the king, who stood with bowed head, as he spoke. - -Azurma at once obeyed, and when she began talking the king lifted his -head and nodded in a pleased manner. - -He replied to all the girls’ questions, who, in turn, translated the -conversation to Lacy. - -The substance of it was that the people were really called Naztecs, and -that their race had been in existence for hundreds of years. - -For the past century the population had gradually dwindled, from some -unknown cause, and they now numbered scarcely seven hundred, all told. - -Many, many years before, the king said, one of their beautiful maidens -had disappeared, leaving word that she would surely come back, or else -send some one in her place, who was as beautiful as her, in some future -generation. - -This had been recorded by the forefathers of the Naztecs, and, -consequently, they were always on the lookout for the girl to turn up. - -When they saw Azurma they took it for granted that she was the one sent -in place of the lost maiden of ages before. - -With this brief explanation we will proceed. - -Azurma was cute enough to allow the Naztecs to believe that she was -really the one they took her to be. - -By so doing she came in possession of a power which she would not -otherwise have had. - -She had no difficulty in persuading the king to set Lacy and his dog -free, and give them the privilege of going anywhere about the city. - -She told his royal highness where she had come from, and he at once set -forth his desire to visit Hez, if possible. - -Whereupon Azurma set her people down as a bloodthirsty race, and -offered to lead the Naztecs upon them at some future day, and -exterminate them. - -This seemed to satisfy the king, and he gave orders that hereafter -Azurma should be treated as a princess. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII. WHAT HAPPENED TO DICK AND QUEEN OLIVE. - - -When Dick Vincey felt the cold snout of an animal touching his face, a -convulsive shudder ran over his body. - -He thought that his earthly career was ended, for a certainty. - -But, instead of being seized and torn to pieces by the horrible -picuasus, as he supposed it to be, the animal uttered a low whine, and -began licking his face. - -Almost at the same instant the boy heard footsteps approaching. - -Then it flashed across his mind that the animal who stood over him must -be a dog. - -He opened his eyes and strove in vain to pierce the inky darkness and -see what it was. - -The footsteps were coming nearer all the time, and fearful that the -person who was approaching might turn in some other direction, Dick -shouted out: - -“Help!” - -Queen Olive awoke with a wild cry of alarm on her lips, and tremblingly -asked Dick what had happened. - -Before he could reply, a light flashed up and illumined the cave, -almost blinding the two prisoners for a moment. - -But this soon passed off, and they saw a man, attired in a fantastic -garb of limited extent, hurrying toward them. - -A huge dog was standing over Dick, which the boy recognized at once as -Jupiter, the dog he had seen go over the falls with his master. - -But when the man halted in front of them and held his lighted torch -near their faces, a cry of astonishment, intermingled with joy, left -the boy prisoner’s lips. - -It was no other than Reginald Lacy himself who stood before them. - -Lacy seemed to be as much surprised as Dick, but drawing a knife from -his belt, he quickly severed the bonds that held the couple prisoners. - -“How came you here?” he asked, as Dick arose to his feet and patted -Jupiter on the head. - -“You shall hear the whole story,” was the reply; “but let us first get -out of this place. I, for one, have had quite enough of it to last the -rest of my life. Come, Olive, we are saved!” - -Without any further ado, Lacy led the way out of the cave, going -through a long, dark passage, the mouth of which opened into the vast -cavern just above the falls. - -Once here, Dick breathed a sigh of relief. - -“Now, Mr. Lacy,” said he, “I will tell you how the queen of Hez and -myself came to be in the predicament you found us.” - -He then related, in as few words as possible, all that had transpired -in the past few hours, winding up by asking Lacy how he and the dog -escaped death when they went whirling over the falls. - -“That is easily explained,” returned Reginald Lacy, with a smile. -“There were no rocks at the foot of the falls, and, consequently, the -danger of going over them is not great. There is another person who -went safely over them since I did.” - -“Who was it?” asked Dick. “Surely not Azurma?” - -“But it was, just the same. She is now living, and is as hale and -hearty as she ever was.” - -“Where is she?” asked Queen Olive, in an interested manner. - -“In the city of the Naztecs, a few miles from here.” - -“What do you mean?” gasped Dick, in astonishment. - -“Exactly what I say, my boy. There is a race of people, similar in -character to those who live in the Land of Hez, not far from here. -Their city is my home for the present, as well as that of Azurma. But -come, we had better be moving from here; there is no telling when one -of those big turtle spiders might show up. What do you say if you both -accompany me to the city of the Naztecs? I’ll guarantee that you will -be used well.” - -“We will go!” said Queen Olive, suddenly. “It would not do for me to go -back to Hez at this late hour. The people would scarcely believe the -abduction, and it is hard to tell exactly what might take place.” - -“Lead the way, Mr. Lacy,” spoke up Dick. “I am satisfied with anything. -This is a country of wonder and mystery, and I desire to see all I can -of it.” - -Reginald Lacy had left the city with his dog to make an exploration of -the surrounding country. - -Unconsciously his steps led him to the spot where Dick and his fair -companion lay bound hand and foot. - -But it was Jupiter’s fault more than his own that he came that far away -from the little city. - -The dog wanted to pursue an upward course, and Lacy allowed him to have -his way. - -He had passed through many caverns and chambers, and were it not for -the dog, he knew that he would never be able to find his way back again. - -But Jupiter was a dog that could be depended upon, and no one knew this -better than his master. - -Lacy was very much pleased at finding Dick, and as they threaded their -way through the mazes of the underground world, he told the boy about -the presence of Philander Owens in the city they were bound for. - -“I wish,” said he, “that you would see him, and endeavor to get him to -let what has passed be forgotten. He is very bitter against me, though -for what reason it is not likely that anybody, save the pair of us, -will ever know.” - -“I will do all I can,” returned Dick. - -The beautiful queen spoke never a word during the descent into the -valley below. - -That she was becoming weary and footsore was plainly evident by the -manner in which she clung to Dick’s arm. - -She was as much puzzled as Dick when they entered the lighted chamber -and started through it. - -But when they came to what lay beyond she could scarcely believe her -senses. - -She had never laid eyes upon such buildings as the little city -contained, and could hardly bring herself to believe that she was not -dreaming. - -With Dick it was different. He was not surprised at anything, but took -every new thing he saw the same as though he had always been aware of -its existence. - -As Lacy and his dog entered the city with the two strangers, much -excitement was manifested by the Naztecs. - -They crowded around the newcomers, and began asking all sorts of -questions in their peculiar language. - -Queen Olive understood it perfectly, and she lost no time in giving -them all the information they desired. - -Attracted by the confusion outside, Azurma came forth from the room -assigned to her in the purple-hued building. - -As soon as she observed who the strangers were, a cry of joy left her -lips, and she rushed to them. - -“Where is Leo? Did he not come with you?” she asked of Dick. - -“No, he did not,” was the reply. “So you escaped death, after all, -Azurma?” - -“Yes, but no thanks to her who condemned me to death!” said the girl, -looking at her former queen. - -“Was it my fault that you were condemned to death?” asked Queen Olive, -in a calm voice. - -“No,” replied the girl, after a moment’s thought. “Forgive me for -speaking as I did. You did but your duty.” - -Then, as is generally the case, the two women embraced each other, and -were more friendly than they had ever been before. - -The Naztecs seemed very proud of their visitors, and treated them with -the utmost kindness. - -They were also given rooms in the palace, and a royal reception was -held in their honor. - -But though Dick was treated after the manner of a prince, and had the -girl he loved near him, he was yet far from being happy. - -Had he been in his own country, with Leo and the rest of his associates -about him, it would have been different. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX. LEO WEDS, AFTER ALL. - - -When the new queen had reigned for a year, she one day took it in her -head to modify one of the principal laws of Hez. - -It was to change the time of the maidens waiting for their husbands -from two years to six months. - -As this was more of a common-sense view of the matter, her people -unanimously agreed to it, with the exception of Roderique de Amilo. - -He was for keeping the ancient laws of the country the same. - -But one against so many did not amount to much, so the law went into -force. - -Elated by the favor with which her new law was received, the queen, -whose name, by the way, was Nalie, concluded to make another change, -and a big one, at that. - -Hitherto none of the males born in Hez had been allowed to marry under -any consideration. - -Consequently the race was fast dying out, as very few men from the -outside world came to the strange country, and when they did, it was -merely by accident. - -When her majesty issued this edict, she announced that her reason for -doing so was to keep the race in existence forever. - -This, too, met with the approval of the Hezzians. - -The day soon arrived which the queen had fixed when all those who -desired to enter a state of matrimony could do so, and nearly all the -unmarried ones took advantage of it. - -The building in which dwelt the supposed founder of the Hez race, -Roderique de Amilo, who was to perform the ceremony, was a circular -one, and contained but two rooms. The rest of the space was taken up by -a broad hall, which opened at either end of the house. - -There were no seats of any kind in the hall, and, consequently, all had -to stand up. - -When Leo, whom the queen had chosen for her future husband, and Nalie -arrived, De Amilo had just commenced to marry some of the Hezzians to -the maidens they had chosen. - -The ceremony was about the same as the Spanish one of to-day, only it -was somewhat shorter. - -The couples were married as fast as the acting priest could rattle off -the words of the ceremony, and sent away happy. - -At length it came Prof. Easy’s turn, and with his face wreathed in -smiles, he stepped up to the scratch with his blushing, young bride -leaning upon his arm. - -As soon as the knot was tied, they marched off to the little house that -had been assigned to them. - -Next came Martin Haypole, and then Lucky. - -When these had been disposed of, there was but one couple left, and -that was Leo and the queen. - -A few had remained to see their ruler married, but the majority had -gone away to their usual avocations. - -As Leo and his fair companion stepped to the front, there was a -disturbance at one end of the hall, and a figure rushed in. - -Leo turned hastily around, and a cry of astonishment left his lips. - -It was Azurma, the girl whom he thought dead, who had rushed in. - -She stood in front of Queen Nalie with uplifted hands, but not a word -escaped her lips. - -Everybody in the building recognized her, and a wild yell of terror -went up. - -Down upon their faces went all save Leo, who was thunderstruck, but not -frightened in the least. - -Azurma glided to him, and, placing her hand upon his shoulder, said: - -“Come, my Leo; I will take you to your cousin Dick, who yet lives.” - -Hardly knowing what he did, the boy followed her from the building. - -No one barred their progress, and in a couple of minutes they had -entered one of the numerous passages, and were lost to view. - -Leo followed Azurma through the passage without saying a word. - -He was very much mystified at the girl’s sudden appearance. - -Over a year before she had been condemned to death, and he had seen her -with his own eyes go shooting into the turbulent stream that flowed -through the Devil’s Kingdom. - -He remembered Azurma’s last words, as he followed her along, and he -began to think that not only the Land of Hez was one of mystery, but -the ones who lived in it mysterious, also. - -The girl clung to his arm and did not offer to speak until they had -reached a point fully a mile from the village governed by Queen Nalie. - -Azurma related her miraculous escape, and told how she reached the land -of the Naztecs, how Reginald Lacy and his dog had found Dick and Queen -Olive in the cave, and wound up by saying that both she and Queen Olive -had been created princesses in the Naztec nation, and that Dick had -been the king’s adviser for the past seven months. - -She also informed him that Philander Owens was a resident of the city, -and that he and Reginald Lacy had buried the hatchet, and were now fast -friends. - -They had married sisters, she said, and lived in the same house. - -All this was startling news to Leo, and he longed for the moment when -he could meet Dick and embrace him. - -Azurma, who knew the way perfectly, led him to the grounds near the -foot of the falls, by way of the rocky descent near the Devil’s Kingdom. - -In a little over an hour from the time the two left Hez they reached -the mouth of the long, lighted chamber leading to the strange -underground city. - -Before they were halfway through this they met Reginald Lacy and -Jupiter, the dog. - -The meeting between Leo and Lacy was a very pleasant one, and the -faithful dog, who recognized the young fellow at once, pranced -playfully about his feet. - -“Come,” said Lacy, leading the way--“come and see what you think of our -city.” - -They reached the end of the wide passage and descended into the cave -below. - -Leo was not a little astonished at what he saw, and when he reached the -center of the little place he could not suppress a cry of admiration. - -The meeting between the cousins was a joyous, not to say affecting, one. - -Leo had supposed Dick to be dead, and Dick had worried considerably as -to how Leo was getting on in Hez. - -Leo’s surprise was complete when Olive--as we will hereafter call the -ex-queen of Hez--came forth, carrying an infant son about a month old -in her arms. - -“This is my wife and son, Leo,” said Dick. “The youngster is named -after you. What do you think of him?” - -“What do I think of him? I congratulate you, old fellow! Why, it don’t -seem possible that you are a man of family. And your wife! Well, she -hasn’t lost any of her good looks. I tell you, wonders will never -cease. I am the only single man left in our party of swamp explorers -now.” - -“Is that so?” asked Dick. “I thought that none of them could marry -until two years had elapsed.” - -“The new queen changed the law. The professor, Haypole and Lucky were -married to-day; and if Azurma had not showed up just as she did, I, -too, would have been a benedict.” - -“Who was to have been the bride?” asked Olive. - -“Your sister--Queen Nalie.” - -“Ah! Was it an act of your own free will and accord?” - -“No, hardly;” and Leo explained the whole circumstance from beginning -to end. - -“How is the new queen liked by the people of Hez?” - -“Very well, I guess.” - -“Do you know one thing?”--and Dick’s wife called Leo aside. “I have -agreed to leave this underground world with my husband, if we can find -a way to get out, and go, with him to the land of his own people. He is -making arrangements to lead a number of the men of this place to Hez -and capture it. That once done, he says, he can easily find some means -of getting to the outside world.” - -“That’s true, old fellow, chimed in Dick. - -“I now have eighty good fighting men at my command, and I think we -shall be able to down the Hezzians, even if they do outnumber us.” - -“You can count on me to do my part, I assure you,” said Leo. - -The Naztecs seemed to be pleased at another addition to their number. - -Dick, Lacy and Owens had taught them many things they had been entirely -ignorant of; and as they were an intelligent race, they were constantly -on the lookout to learn something new. - -Leo now appeared to be more contented than he had at any time since he -came to the land of mystery. - -He soon got used to the mode of living in the country of the Naztecs, -and, like his predecessors, soon acquired their language. - -There was only one thing that bothered him, save his desire to get to -his native heath once more, and that was the undying love Azurma bore -him. - -He liked the girl well enough; but, unlike Dick, he did not allow -himself to become “gone” on any of the beauties of the strange land. - -But duty told him that he ought to marry the girl, for she was growing -thinner every day, and all on account of him. - -He concluded to wed her, and make the best of it, and one day, about -three weeks after his advent into the Naztec country, Leo and Azurma -were made man and wife according to the established rules of the -country. - -There never was a happier bride in the whole world than Azurma; and -from that time until the day of her death Leo never regretted marrying -her. - - - - -CHAPTER XX. MANUFACTURING A CANNON. - - -Leo Malvern had not been long in the city of the Naztecs ere he began -to assist Dick in training the men how to fight. - -Like his cousin, he desired to make his way to the Land of Hez and -force a way to the outside world. - -Neither allowed the Naztecs to become aware of what their intentions -were after they had once defeated the Hezzians in battle, but trusted -to luck to leave them in possession of Hez and force their way out. - -While working about the soil near the city, Dick had discovered the -materials for making a first-class blasting powder, and by means of -this they hoped to blow open the door in the obelisk and thus find -their way to freedom. - -The discovery of a combustible substance that could be set off by a -spark set Philander Owens to thinking. - -He knew full well that the men of Hez outnumbered the party Dick and -Leo intended to lead against them, by three or four to one. - -Consequently, something more powerful in the line of weapons than -spears and axes must be introduced. - -Owens was an inventive sort of genius, and it did not take him long to -figure out how a destructive weapon could be made. - -There was a bed of copper ore in the vicinity of the underground city -of the Naztecs, and Owens went to work mining a quantity of this. - -He did not inform anyone of his intentions until he was forced to for -want of help in his undertaking. - -One day he called Dick and Leo aside and said: - -“Are you most ready to march upon the Hezzians and fight your way to -the outside world?” - -“Yes,” replied Dick; “we have got the eighty men pretty well drilled -now.” - -“If we had a nice, little cannon--say a ten-pounder--we could work our -way through them nicely, couldn’t we?” - -“I should say we could!” exclaimed Leo. “But why do you speak of such a -thing when it is entirely out of the question?” - -“I don’t think it is out of the question, my boy.” - -“What do you mean?” asked Dick, with wide-open eyes. - -“I mean just this--I am going to cast a gun.” - -The cousins were too much astonished to speak, but when Owens went on -and explained his plans, they fell in with him, heart and soul. - -The first thing to do now was to procure something to melt the ore in. - -Dick concluded to ask the king for what he wanted, and he accordingly -did so, telling him that it would add to their advantage in routing the -Hezzians when the attack was made. - -“There is naught in the city that would serve for such a purpose, -unless it be in the sacred cave.” - -“Where is that?” asked Dick. - -“On the hillside, at the south of the city.” - -“Will you allow me to go there and see if I can find what I want?” - -“Wait,” said the king; “let me tell you about the sacred cave. The -mouth of it is sealed, and has been for many, many years. It was -decreed by a former king that no person of the Naztec nation should -ever break the seal and enter it. It contains all the articles -required for smelting copper, silver, gold and other metals. At that -time working in metals was one of the principal industries of the -place, since it was then that the houses in the city were built. - -“You will observe that they are all built of stone and metal. The -metal, of course, had to be cast to be wrought into its proper shape. -And so it went on, till the houses were all done, and the city of the -Naztecs completed. Then it was that the king issued the edict that -all the smelting appurtenances should be placed in the cave and its -entrance sealed.” - -“That’s quite an interesting story, I assure you,” remarked Dick. -“Then, if what you say is true, the very things we need are in the -cave.” - -“Yes, but we dare not open it.” - -“None of the Naztec nation dare do it, you mean.” - -“Exactly.” - -“But I am not of the Naztec nation. I may open it, I suppose?” - -The king thought a moment, and then said: - -“As you please. I will neither tell you to do it nor not to do it. I -trust that you will in due time get your weapon of warfare constructed, -though.” - -That settled it. - -Dick at once repaired to Leo and Philander Owens, and told them what he -had learned. - -Reginald Lacy was sought, and together the four repaired to the sacred -cave. - -They had no difficulty in finding it, since the king had told Dick -exactly where it was. - -By dint of using a couple of heavy, metal bars, they managed to pry a -stone from the entrance, which was sealed with a substance like cement. - -When the stone was rolled sufficiently aside, a cry of joy escaped the -lips of the four. - -The cave was evidently just as it had been left when the workers in -metal had completed their job so many years before. - -It contained a pair of huge furnaces, crucibles, ladles for dipping out -the molten metal, and everything needful. - -But all these things were quaint and very ancient in appearance, -reminding our friends of what they had read concerning the building of -King Solomon’s Temple, in the Bible days. - -Not one of the Naztecs bothered them while they busied themselves about -the cave. - -There was an abundance of fuel for the furnaces in the place, and -before an hour had elapsed Dick and Leo had kindled the fires. - -Meanwhile, Owens and Lacy had been busy in conveying the copper ore to -the place. - -Not until they had deposited all they thought they needed in the cave -did they discover an abundant supply already there, of copper, silver -and gold. - -The silver was more plentiful than any of the rest of the ore and -at the suggestion of Lacy, it was decided to cast their cannon of -four-fifths of copper and one-fifth silver. - -Quite an expensive gun, the reader might say. But of what use was -the silver to our friends in that out-of-the-way place? Even if they -succeeded in defeating the Hezzians and getting out of the underground -place, it would be impossible to carry much away with them. - -Anyhow, there was more than enough gold to load each of the four down, -and they made up their minds to take all they could of this with them. - -Now that they had succeeded in obtaining the metal and the means of -melting it, the next thing was to manufacture a mold. - -But Philander Owens considered this the easiest part of it, and in less -than half a day he had made one sufficient to answer the purpose. - -He formed it by digging a hole in a bed of soft sand of the depth -required for the proposed cannon, and then by running a round piece of -wood of the size of the bore they wanted down into this within a few -inches of the bottom, the mold was complete. - -Of course the touchhole would have to be drilled, and the wood burned -out afterward. - -When everything was in readiness, Dick and Leo held the stick firmly in -its place, and Lacy and Owens poured in the molten mixture. - -There was a furious sizzling for a minute or so, and then, when the -steam caused by the intense heat coming in contact with damp sand had -cleared away, they saw that, to all appearances, their cast had been -successful. - -An examination told them that it was a success, and a complete one, -at that. They did not even have to burn the stick out, for the wood, -though being of the hardest kind, had shrunk a trifle, which allowed -them to pull it out easily enough. - -“Hurrah!” exclaimed Leo, waving his cap in the air. “Now, to bore out -the touchhole and our cannon is completed!” - -As soon as it had cooled, they dug it out and rolled it over upon the -ground. - -While Lacy and Owens were engaged in boring out the touchhole, the -cousins melted up a number of bars of gold into a shape convenient to -take with them. - -It took the two men some time to make the required hole, and, at -length, when they had completed it, they had been at least twelve hours -in constructing their cannon. - -“Now,” observed Dick, “we must try it before we go home.” - -The rest promptly agreed with him, and he proceeded to load the huge -weapon with a good charge of the powder that had been manufactured by -them. - -This was plentifully wadded and pounded in thoroughly, and then they -prepared to set it off. - -To avoid any possible accident, a slow-match was rigged and lighted, -and then they repaired to a safe distance to await the result. - -There was a fizzing noise, made by the slow-match, and a few seconds -later a terrific explosion rang out, which shook the very ground upon -which they stood. - -At the very instant it died out a rumbling sound was heard, and the -unknown light that illumined the strange country went out as if by -magic, leaving them in total darkness! - - - - -CHAPTER XXI. THE EARTHQUAKE SHOCK. - - -Two years had slipped by since the advent of the party into the land of -mystery, and at length the white men left in Hez determined they would -endeavor to find their companions who had disappeared, and who, they -believed, were not far distant, but for some reason were prevented from -rejoining them. - -Prof. Easy, Haypole and Jones concluded to make an effort to find a way -to get below on a level with the Devil’s Kingdom. - -They set out very early one morning, taking the passage that led to the -brink of the latter-named place. - -When they arrived there they began carefully studying their -surroundings, to find a means of descent. - -They had scarcely been there ten minutes when a low rumble was heard, -coming, it seemed, from beneath them. - -“An earthquake!” exclaimed the professor. - -The words had hardly left his lips when all three were thrown upon the -ground by a tremendous shock, which lasted nearly half a minute. - -When they rose to their feet, a few moments later, in a half-dazed -condition, a startling sight met their gaze. - -The light, which had hitherto been quite bright, was now very dim, and -flashed forth in fitful bursts. - -But it was enough to enable them to see that a huge pile of rocks had -been scattered about, showing a clear passage to the country below. - -“If there are no further shocks,” remarked the professor, calmly, “this -will prove a Godsend to us. It has shown us what we have been looking -for for so long.” - -They waited for perhaps half an hour, and then, as they experienced no -further signs of another quake, they started down the decline before -them. - -Down they went, until they struck the level of the stream that emerged -from the Devil’s Kingdom. - -Once here, they had no difficulty in discovering footprints made by -somebody who had been there before them. - -“Hurrah!” shouted the Yankee. “I knew I was right. We’ll find Leo and -Dick sure--see if we don’t! These are the prints of the gal’s feet, who -brought Leo here.” - -His companions were forced to admit that he was right, and so they -followed the trail along the bank of the stream until the falls were -reached, and then another descent had to be made. - -There was nothing to hinder them from going down, so they did so at -once. - -Andrew Jones produced a torch, and was just about to light it, when -Haypole caught him by the arm in an excited manner, and exclaimed: - -“Gosh-ding it, look there! It looks like a political torchlight -procession, don’t it?” - -He pointed to a spot on their left as he spoke. - -About three miles distant they plainly observed a band of men, carrying -torches, emerge from the mouth of a cavernous passage. - -“I ain’t got a great deal of money with me, but I’ll be ding-wizzened -if I won’t bet fifty dollars that Leo is in that gang!” said the -Yankee, producing his pocketbook in a matter-of-fact way. - -“I have not got any money, and if I had I would not bet with you,” -returned Jones. “I am of the same opinion as you. Let us advance toward -them; we can get near enough to see just who and what they are without -being observed ourselves.” - -“Agreed!” exclaimed Prof. Easy; whereupon they set out in the direction -of the approaching torchlights. - -As they gradually neared them, they saw that there were about thirty -persons marching along, dragging some heavy concern behind them, and -carrying torches. - -“Do you know what I am a-goin’ ter do?” said Martin Haypole, coming -to a halt. “I am a-goin’ ter fire off my revolver an’ prove that Leo -Malvern is in that crowd.” - -In an instant he had drawn his revolver and fired a shot. - -The echo of the report had scarcely died out when there was an -answering one from the approaching torch bearers. - -“Great boots!” yelled the Yankee, jumping about three feet in the air; -“what did I tell you?” - -Then he opened wide his mouth and led his companions in a deafening -cheer. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII. FREEDOM AT LAST. - - -Well satisfied that Leo was in the approaching party of torch bearers, -the professor and his two companions hurried to meet them as fast as -they could run. - -In less than five minutes the two parties met. - -A cry of joy went up from the three searchers. - -There were four men of their own race in the party of torch bearers. - -A single glance told them this much, and they also recognized all four. - -They were Leo Malvern, Dick Vincey, Reginald Lacy and Philander Owens. - -Martin Haypole uttered a whoop, and, rushing forward, seized the hands -of the two brave, young fellows who had been his companions in their -journey through the Everglades to the end of mystery. - -“I’m downright glad to see you both alive an’ well!” he exclaimed. -“Where in thunderation have you been so long, Dick?” - -“I can tell you the whole thing in a few words,” replied Dick, as he -shook hands with his former associates. - -Then he proceeded to relate what had befallen him from the time he and -the queen had disappeared from the magic chamber. - -When he came to the point where their newly constructed cannon was -fired off, in order to test it, he said: - -“The report must have caused some disturbance among the gases and -electric fluids in the underground country, for immediately afterward -there came a terrible shock, and everything was in darkness. - -“It seemed to be a veritable earthquake, and we were thrown to the -ground with such force that it was several minutes before we regained -our senses and rose to our feet. - -“When we did so we knew that something awful had happened, so we put -for the city with all possible speed. - -“On arriving there, we discovered that it was but a mass of ruins. - -“Every building in it was leveled to the ground, and all the -combustible substances in the place had taken fire from the burning -furnaces that had been in some of the houses. - -“As the flames leaped upward it was a grand but terrible sight, and we -could but look upon it with a feeling of awe. - -“But we were sickened at heart when we learned, a few minutes later, -that of all the inhabitants of the thriving little city, only -twenty-nine were left. - -“The others had all been crushed to death by the falling buildings. - -“Among the victims of the terrible disaster, brought about by the -discharge of our gun, were our wives--I mean Queen Olive, Azurma and -two Naztec ladies, whom Lacy and Owens were wedded to. - -“The survivors were terror-stricken, and begged us to lead them from -the spot at once to the land of the Hezzians, and fearful that another -shock might take place, we placed our gun on an improvised drag and -started, knowing that we could do nothing further for those who lay -beneath the ruins of the city. - -“Full of sorrow, we turned the angle that hid our view of the destroyed -city, and journeyed through the chamber of rock to the open. - -“Here everything was in darkness, but we had provided ourselves with -torches, and lighted them as we emerged. Shortly after that we heard -the shot you fired, and Leo answered it. That is all there is of it, -but it is quite enough, I can tell you.” - -There were tears in Dick’s eyes as he related the events that had so -recently taken place, and, recognizing the situation, the professor -and his two companions did not question him further. - -On the contrary, they related their experiences since they had parted -company, and then, seizing hold of the ropes attached to the drag, they -all started for Hez. - -Andrew Jones knew full well that the Hezzians would not allow them to -depart in peace from the underground world, or he would never have -sanctioned the movement to drag the cannon along with them. - -He thought if the destructive powers of the weapon was once proved to -them, they would give in and allow the party to depart. - -It was no easy matter to drag the heavy piece up the steep hills they -were forced to traverse, but there were enough to do it, and so they -managed it very well. - -On their way to Hez they observed that the earthquake, or whatever it -might be called, had caused many changes. - -But, luckily for them, their way was not blocked up, and in due time -they came in sight of the village. - -But what a wonderful change had been wrought here! - -The surface of the ground above had given way and caved in, making the -opening above the village of stone huts more than four times its former -size. - -The majority of the buildings were buried from sight beneath tons of -dirt, and not a sign of any of the Hezzians could be seen. - -The earth had caved in in the form of a slant, and, with a cry of joy, -our friends began mounting this. - -When they reached the top crust of the earth once more, a prayer of -heartfelt thanks left the lips of one and all. - -But the Naztecs could not be induced to follow them to the outside. - -The light of day was so strange to them that they were too frightened -to proceed further. - -In vain did Dick and Leo coax them to come up; but they only shook -their heads, and at length turned their steps in the direction of their -former homes in the bowels of the earth. - -The swamp explorers found themselves upon a comparatively high piece -of ground, which was surrounded by the marsh lands that composed the -greater portion of the vast Everglades. - -It was the first time they had set eyes upon the huge trees and tangled -undergrowth of the outside world in two whole years, and, dreary as -their surroundings were, they thought it the most beautiful sight they -had ever witnessed. - -Those who had reached the earth’s surface were Dick Vincey, Leo -Malvern, Prof. Remington Easy, Martin Haypole, Andrew Jones, Reginald -Lacy and Philander Owens. - -The only one missing of those who had entered the door in the obelisk, -two years before, was Lucky, the darky. - -Leo and Dick thought of this at about the same time, and were for going -back to search for him. - -As they were arguing over the matter with their friends they heard a -whistle in the distance, and, on looking in the direction it came from, -discovered the darky approaching them. - -“Hurrah!” yelled Lucky, as he observed them, “I’s so glad I hab foun’ -youse, Massa Leo and Massa Dick.” - -“How did you get out of the Land of Hez?” asked Leo. - -“De roof done cave in a little while back an’ kill putty nigh all de -people. I run for de stairs dat we cum down when we fust cum here, an’ -went up them till I seed a light. I got out easy enough, as de big -gravestone had fall down an’ broke in two. I was terribly scared--’deed -I was; an’ waited in de bushes till I heered youse a-talkin’. Den I -whistled an’ cum over here.” - -That was the explanation Lucky gave for his sudden appearance, and it -about covered the matter. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII. OUT OF THE EVERGLADES. - - -“Now, then,” observed Dick Vincey, “let us leave the land of mystery -forever! We have passed through many strange things while in it, and -many enjoyable days, as well. Let us say farewell to the underground -world and our families, who are buried beneath the ruins of the Naztec -city and the village of Hez!” - -There were tears in the eyes of the young man as he spoke, and, with -their eyes turned to the cavern they had emerged from, all hands -uttered the one word: - -“Farewell!” - -Then they left the spot and started for the place where the obelisk had -been. - -The huge stone column lay upon the ground in a dozen pieces, while the -stairs leading into the earth’s bowels were plainly visible. - -“Now,” said Leo, “to get out of the Everglades.” - -As they started over the ground in the direction they first came, Dick -suddenly missed Jupiter, the dog, for the first time. - -When he came to think of it, he had not seen him since they left the -ruined city of the Naztecs. - -He spoke about it to his friends. - -“The poor animal must have been killed during the earthquake, and his -master was too much excited to notice his absence,” said Leo. - -The attire worn by our friends was of the style of the places they had -lived in, and they looked curious enough as they made their way through -the swamp. - -When they came through the Everglades, they had chipped the trees on -the route they took, and as these marks were still plainly visible they -anticipated but little difficulty in getting back to their boat, the -_Maid of the Marsh_, which was looked upon with so much disgust by the -Yankee. - -They found the boat half covered with mud, but otherwise she was -uninjured. - -It took them nearly a day to clean her and get her ready for use once -more, and when this job was finished all hands felt better. - -A week or so later eight forlorn-appearing men might have been seen -camped upon the borders of Lake Okechobee. - -They were Dick Vincey, Leo Malvern, Prof. Remington Easy, Martin -Haypole, Andrew Jones, Philander Owens, Reginald Lacy and the darky, -Lucky. - -The long gowns they wore were torn and dirty, and they looked more like -a crowd of ragpickers than anything else. - -But they would soon be in the limits of civilization again, and they -felt thankful for it. - -Their journey from the Land of Hez to their present position had been a -perilous one, indeed. - -But by perseverance and pluck they managed to elude the quicksands -of the great swamp, and escape from being devoured by the ferocious -alligators it contained. - -Two weeks more and they reached the home of Leo Malvern. - -It is needless to state that the cousins were received with pleasure. - -Their relatives had long given them up as dead, and hence their joy at -meeting them alive and well. - -The wonderful story of their adventures was taken as a joke at first, -but when all hands stoutly adhered to it, the relatives of Dick and Leo -were forced to believe it. - -“There are a few questions I would like ter ask some of you fellows,” -said Martin Haypole, a day or two after their arrival at Leo’s home. -“First--who built the obelisk at the entrance of Hez? Second--was the -legend of Hez true, and was Roderique de Amilo as old as he claimed? -Third--was the pool and fountain in the dazzlingly lighted cavern -really the Fountain of Youth Ponce de Leon was in search of? And, -fourth--was it really the discharge of the cannon that caused the -earthquake that wrought such a ruin upon the city of the Naztecs and -the Land of Hez?” - -As the Yankee asked these questions he knocked the ashes from his pipe -and glanced around at his hearers. - -“Your questions will never be answered in this world,” replied the -professor, gravely. “We can form our own opinions--that is all.” - -And so it is. We have stated the incidents of our story in a manner -meant to be plain; now we will leave the reader to answer Martin -Haypole’s questions. - -THE END. - -The next issue of BRAVE AND BOLD, No. 128, will contain “Stonia -Stedman’s Triumph; or, A Young Mechanic’s Trials.” This story relates -the experiences that befell a young workman, and shows how he -eventually triumphed over a clique of jealous fellow workers, at the -same time unearthing the schemes of a band of dangerous moonshiners. Be -sure and read Stonia’s gallant struggle against great odds. - - * * * * * - -BE A ROOTER - - _Root For a Record in the National Game and for Tip Top Prizes_ - -[Illustration: TIP TOP’S NATIONAL BASE BALL CONTEST] - -Do You Want to Try for the Pennant? - -Do You Want a Fine Outfit for Your Team? - -Do You Want to Score High in the National Game? - - _HERE IS YOUR CHANCE_ - -Root for the Famous Tip Top Prizes and Pennant - - PLAY BALL - -_Watch Every Number for Further Announcements_ - - - - - * * * * * - - - - -Transcriber’s note: - -Based on the available evidence, the author for this book is most -likely Cornelius Shea. - -This story originally appeared, very likely in a longer version, -as “Under the Everglades; or, Two Years in a Land of Mystery,” -_Golden Hours_ issues 176 through 185, June 13, 1891 to -August 15, 1891, published by Norman L. Munro & Company. - -Punctuation has been made consistent. - -Variations in spelling and hyphenation were retained as they appear in -the original publication, except that obvious typos have been corrected. - -Changes have been made as follows: - -p. 22: “hate as he darted” changed to “hate darted” (of hate darted) - -p. 30: “looking for so” changed to “looking for for so” (looking for -for so) - - - -***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE WONDERFUL LAND OF HEZ*** - - -******* This file should be named 50654-0.txt or 50654-0.zip ******* - - -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: -http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/5/0/6/5/50654 - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/50654-0.zip b/old/50654-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fede2c9..0000000 --- a/old/50654-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/50654-h.zip b/old/50654-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6cb2bc5..0000000 --- a/old/50654-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/50654-h/50654-h.htm b/old/50654-h/50654-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index a238ec3..0000000 --- a/old/50654-h/50654-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6398 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8" /> -<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of In the Wonderful Land of Hez, by Cornelius Shea</title> - <style type="text/css"> - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - - h1,h2,h3,h4 { - text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ - clear: both; -} - -p { - margin-top: .51em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .49em; -} - -/*Modified horizontal rules to fix ePub display issue*/ -hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; -} - -hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;} -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} - -hr.full{ - background-color:black; - margin-top: 0.2em; - margin-bottom: 0.2em; - width: 99%; - margin-left: 0.5%; - margin-right: 0.5%; - height:0.1em; - clear: both; -} - -/*End modified horizontal rule CSS*/ - -.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ - /* visibility: hidden; */ - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; -} /* page numbers */ - -.boxit{ - max-width: 25em; - padding: 1em; - border: 0em solid black; - margin: 0 auto; } - -.boxit1{ - max-width: 44.8em; - padding: 1em; - border: 0.15em solid black; - margin: 0 auto; } - -.boxit2{ - max-width: 45em; - padding: 0.2em; - border: 0.15em solid black; - margin: 0 auto; } - -.doublerule{ - max-width: 35em; - padding: 0.1em; - border-style:solid; - border-color:black; - border-width: 0.1em 0em 0.1em 0em; - margin: 0 auto; } - -.boxit3{ - max-width: 45em; - padding: 0em; - border: 0em solid black; - margin: 0 auto; } - -.boxit4{ - max-width: 40em; - padding: 1em; - border: 0.3em solid black; - margin: 0 auto; } - -.hangindent{ - text-indent: -1.5em; - padding-left: 1.5em; - text-align:left;} - -.doublerule{ - max-width: 45em; - padding: 0.05em; - border-style:solid; - border-color:black; - border-width: 0.1em 0em 0.1em 0em; - margin: 0 auto; } - -.center {text-align: center;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.caption {font-weight: bold;} - -/* Images */ -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; -} - -/* Transcriber's notes */ -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; - color: black; - font-size:smaller; - padding:0.5em; - margin-bottom:5em; - font-family:sans-serif, serif; } - -/*CSS to set font sizes*/ -/*font sizes for non-header font changes*/ -.xxlargefont{font-size: xx-large} -.xlargefont{font-size: x-large} -.largefont{font-size: large} -.mediumfont{font-size: medium} -.smallfont{font-size: small} -.boldfont{font-weight:bold} -.titlefont{font-size:large} - -/*CSS to force a page break in ePub*/ -div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} - -/*CSS markup for handhelds -- put at end of CSS*/ -@media handheld -{ - img {max-width: 100%; height: auto;} /*Limit width to display*/ - - h2.no-break - { - page-break-before: avoid; - padding-top: 0; - } -} -/*End CSS for handhelds*/ - - hr.pg { width: 100%; - margin-top: 3em; - margin-bottom: 0em; - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; - height: 4px; - border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ - border-style: solid; - border-color: #000000; - clear: both; } - </style> -</head> -<body> -<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, In the Wonderful Land of Hez, by Cornelius -Shea</h1> -<p>This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States -and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no -restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it -under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this -eBook or online at <a -href="http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you are not -located in the United States, you'll have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this ebook.</p> -<p>Title: In the Wonderful Land of Hez</p> -<p> or, The Mystery of the Fountain of Youth</p> -<p>Author: Cornelius Shea</p> -<p>Release Date: December 9, 2015 [eBook #50654]</p> -<p>Language: English</p> -<p>Character set encoding: UTF-8</p> -<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE WONDERFUL LAND OF HEZ***</p> -<p> </p> -<h4>E-text prepared by Craig Kirkwood, Demian Katz,<br /> - and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> - (<a href="http://www.pgdp.net">http://www.pgdp.net</a>)<br /> - from page images generously made available by<br /> - Villanova University Digital Library<br /> - (<a href="http://digital.library.villanova.edu">http://digital.library.villanova.edu</a>)</h4> -<p> </p> -<table border="0" style="background-color: #ccccff;margin: 0 auto;" cellpadding="10"> - <tr> - <td valign="top"> - Note: - </td> - <td> - Images of the original pages are available through - the Villanova University Digital Library. See - <a href="http://digital.library.villanova.edu/Item/vudl:293263"> - http://digital.library.villanova.edu/Item/vudl:293263</a> - </td> - </tr> -</table> -<p> </p> -<p> </p> -<div class="transnote"> -<h2 style="margin-top: 0em">Transcriber’s Note:</h2> - -<p>The Table of Contents was created by the transcriber and placed in -the public domain.</p> - -<p><a href="#TN_end">An additional transcriber’s note</a> is at the -end.</p> -</div><p> </p> -<hr class="pg" /> -<p> </p> -<p> </p> -<p> </p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 608px;"> -<img id="coverpage" src="images/cover.jpg" width="608" height="850" alt="" /> -</div> - -<div style="padding-top:4em"> -</div> - - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<div class="boxit"> -<p class="center xlargefont boldfont">TABLE OF CONTENTS</p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_I_AN_ECCENTRIC_COUPLE">I. AN ECCENTRIC COUPLE.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_II_AN_ACCEPTED_PROPOSITION">II. AN ACCEPTED PROPOSITION.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_III_THE_STONE_CUBE_AND_THE_OBELISK">III. THE STONE CUBE AND THE OBELISK.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV_WHERE_THE_STAIRS_LED_TO">IV. WHERE THE STAIRS LED TO.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_V_THE_DANCE_OF_DEATH">V. THE DANCE OF DEATH.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI_ESTO_PERPETUA">VI. “ESTO PERPETUA.”</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII_THE_LEGEND_OF_HEZ">VII. THE LEGEND OF HEZ.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII_DICK_VINCEY_AND_THE_QUEEN">VIII. DICK VINCEY AND THE QUEEN.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX_THE_DEVILS_KINGDOM">IX. THE DEVIL’S KINGDOM.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_X_IN_THE_BOWELS_OF_THE_EARTH">X. IN THE BOWELS OF THE EARTH.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI_AZURMAS_SEARCH">XI. AZURMA’S SEARCH.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII_AZURMA_FINDS_LEO">XII. AZURMA FINDS LEO.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII_BALLOTING_FOR_HUSBANDS">XIII. BALLOTING FOR HUSBANDS.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV_AZURMA_SUFFERS_THE_PENALTY_OF_HER_CRIME">XIV. AZURMA SUFFERS THE PENALTY OF HER CRIME.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV_THE_NAZTECS_AND_THEIR_PRISONERS">XV. THE NAZTECS AND THEIR PRISONERS.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI_DICK_AND_THE_QUEEN_IN_PERIL">XVI. DICK AND THE QUEEN IN PERIL.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII_AZURMA_AND_THE_NAZTECS">XVII. AZURMA AND THE NAZTECS.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII_WHAT_HAPPENED_TO_DICK_AND_QUEEN_OLIVE">XVIII. WHAT HAPPENED TO DICK AND QUEEN OLIVE.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX_LEO_WEDS_AFTER_ALL">XIX. LEO WEDS, AFTER ALL.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XX_MANUFACTURING_A_CANNON">XX. MANUFACTURING A CANNON.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI_THE_EARTHQUAKE_SHOCK">XXI. THE EARTHQUAKE SHOCK.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII_FREEDOM_AT_LAST">XXII. FREEDOM AT LAST.</a></p> -<p class="hangindent"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII_OUT_OF_THE_EVERGLADES">XXIII. OUT OF THE EVERGLADES.</a></p> -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 550px;"> -<img src="images/i_001a.jpg" width="550" height="650" alt="" /> -<div class="caption"><p>Something snapped above them, and down came the girl, bringing the skeleton with her, -knocking the daring boy flat upon his back.</p></div> -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p> - -<div class="boxit2"> -<div class="boxit1"> -<p class="center xxlargefont boldfont">BRAVE & BOLD</p> - -<p class="center xlargefont boldfont"><em>A Different Complete Story Every Week</em></p> -</div></div> - -<div class="boxit3"> -<p class="center smallfont"><em>Issued Weekly. By Subscription $2.50 per year. Entered according to Act of Congress in the year 1905, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, -Washington, D. C., by</em> <span class="smcap">Street & Smith</span>, <em>79-89 Seventh Avenue, New York, N. Y.</em></p> - -<div class="doublerule"></div> - -<p class="center">No. 127. <span style="padding-left:6em; padding-right:6em">NEW YORK, May 27, 1905.</span> Price Five Cents.</p> -</div> - -<div class="doublerule"></div> - - -<h1>IN THE WONDERFUL LAND OF HEZ;<br /> -<span class="mediumfont">OR,</span><br /> -<span class="xlargefont">The Mystery of the Fountain of Youth.</span></h1> - - -<p class="center">By the author of “The Wreck of the ‘Glaucus.’” -</p> - -<h2 class="no-break"><a id="CHAPTER_I_AN_ECCENTRIC_COUPLE">CHAPTER I.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">AN ECCENTRIC COUPLE.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>One fine October afternoon, in the year 1880, a sailboat -might have been seen gliding serenely over the waters -of Lake Okechobee, in the southern part of Florida.</p> - -<p>The boat had but two occupants, and these were so different -in appearance that a little description of them will -not be out of order.</p> - -<p>The elder of the two was attired in a very loose-fitting -suit of blue flannel, and wore a Panama hat.</p> - -<p>He was probably fifty years of age, and one look at -his round, smooth-shaven face would have told the casual -observer that he was a good-hearted individual.</p> - -<p>His eyes were hidden by a pair of blue goggles of extraordinary -proportions, which made the man look as -though he had donned a diver’s helmet.</p> - -<p>In stature this remarkable personage was short and -very stout.</p> - -<p>Prof. Remington Easy was his name, and now, as he -has been introduced, we will turn our attention to his -companion—a tall, lanky individual, attired in corduroy -knee breeches, heavy top-boots, red flannel shirt, linen -coat and a broad-brimmed hat—a typical Yankee, for all -the world.</p> - -<p>This was Martin Haypole, the professor’s right-hand -man.</p> - -<p>The Yankee was not over thirty years of age, and had -it not been for the thin bunch of yellow hair he wore on -his chin, he would have been a fair-looking man.</p> - -<p>Martin was about six feet two inches in height, and -weighed probably one hundred and thirty-five pounds; -thus it will be seen that he possessed not an ounce of superfluous -flesh.</p> - -<p>He had often remarked that what he lacked the professor -amply made up for, and vice versa.</p> - -<p>But what are these two curious individuals doing in this -wild part of Florida? the reader may ask.</p> - -<p>The question is answered in a very few words.</p> - -<p>Prof. Remington Easy was of an exploring turn of -mind.</p> - -<p>About a month before the opening of our story he -became deeply interested in that vast, unexplored region -in the southern part of Florida known as the Everglades.</p> - -<p>The more he studied over the matter the more he became -desirous of penetrating the heart of the swamp and -discovering something wonderful.</p> - -<p>The professor possessed an unlimited supply of cash, -and he spared no expense in fitting himself out for his -trip.</p> - -<p>Thus we now find them in their boat upon the lower -part of Lake Okechobee, within about five miles of the -beginning of the Everglades.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_2">[2]</a></span></p> - -<p>The sun was yet about three hours high, and the professor -hoped to reach a good place to land before the -shades of night gathered around them.</p> - -<p>It was now the second day since they had entered the -upper portion of the lake, by way of the stream beyond -it, and the professor judged that the marshes must be -close at hand.</p> - -<p>Owing to the fact that their boat did not possess one -of those useful things known as a centerboard, and that -the winds had been contrary ever since they entered Lake -Okechobee, they had made but a scant twenty miles in -nearly two days.</p> - -<p>While Prof. Easy was satisfied with this slow mode of -progress, Martin Haypole was not.</p> - -<p>The boat, which was christened <em>Maid of the Marsh</em>, -appeared to be a very insignificant thing in the eyes of -the Yankee.</p> - -<p>He had laughed at it, swore at it and nearly cried -over it.</p> - -<p>And now, just as Prof. Easy made a prodigious effort -and rose to his feet, he began again.</p> - -<p>“I tell you, professor, this is the dod-rottedest boat that -ever sot in water. Them trees there to the south’ard are -ther Everglades; but d’yer think we’ll ever git thar at this -rate? Mought better started in a rowboat. <em>Maid of ther -Marsh!</em> A cussed fine name, ain’t it? I hope she gits -stuck in some marsh afore long, an’ never gits out again. -But I’m ’fraid we’ll both be gray-headed afore she gits to -a marsh. Twenty miles in two days! Well, I swan ter -Guinea! If that ain’t travelin’ in ther nineteenth century, -I’m a downright fule!”</p> - -<p>“Tut, tut, Martin,” replied the professor; “take things -easy. I took notice that you were very glad to get in -the boat day before yesterday, when that big alligator -gave chase after you.”</p> - -<p>“Oh! she were good enough then, professor. I don’t -want a ’gator nosin’ aroun’ me; an’ this tub is good -enough when that kind of work is goin’ on. But when -you come right down ter sailin’, whar in blazes does this -dod-rotted thing come in?”</p> - -<p>“Have patience, Martin. We will reach those trees -yonder in less than an hour. See! a favorable breeze is -even now springing up.”</p> - -<p>The professor was right. For the first time during -their voyage upon the lake the wind was blowing in a direction -suited to their course.</p> - -<p>The hitherto flapping mainsail now bellied out, and the -little craft went skipping through the water like a thing -of life.</p> - -<p>Even Martin Haypole was temporarily satisfied, and -with his hand upon the tiller he watched the rapidly nearing -forest in the swamp district.</p> - -<p>The breeze kept up, and, sure enough, in a little while -they arrived at the end of the lake proper.</p> - -<p>As soon as they got among the trees, the breeze ceased -to exist, and once more the sail flapped idly about the -mast.</p> - -<p>“I’ll be gosh-dinged if we won’t eat supper on land to-night, -anyhow!” exclaimed the Yankee, as he pushed -the boat, by means of a long pole, into a narrow creek, -and made for a little island that was several feet above -the level of the marsh.</p> - -<p>“Good enough, Martin—good enough!” returned his -companion, rubbing his hands. “I am agreeable, I assure -you.”</p> - -<p>At that moment the prow of the boat struck the bank -and caused the fat professor to lose his balance and tumble -overboard.</p> - -<p>“Ha! ha! ha!” laughed the Yankee, as he observed his -employer floundering about in the muddy water. “How -d’ye like it, professor? You laughed at me when I fell -overboard—now it is your turn, by gosh! I told you -laughin’ was catchin’. Now, if one of them ugly ’gators -was ter come along there would be fun. Thunder and -lightnin’! if there ain’t one, now, I’m a rank sinner!”</p> - -<p>A floundering was heard a few feet from the struggling -professor, and a half-grown alligator was seen making -for him with all his might.</p> - -<p>The luckless man had now assumed an upright position, -with the dirty, black water even with his chin, and -as he observed his peril he bellowed lustily for help.</p> - -<p>He strove in vain to reach the gunwale of the boat, -but the distance was too far for his short arms.</p> - -<p>Haypole, with an amused smile upon his face, allowed -the alligator to get within a few feet of his intended prey, -and then reached over suddenly and seized his employer -by the arms.</p> - -<p>He then saw that he would not be able to get him out -as quickly as he had anticipated, and his gleeful look -turned to one of alarm.</p> - -<p>The professor was a heavyweight of the first water, -and had it not been for the fact that Haypole was a very -strong man, the ferocious alligator would certainly have -had a good supper that night.</p> - -<p>But by an almost superhuman effort he jerked him from -the muddy water just as the ferocious monster made a -vicious snap with its huge jaws.</p> - -<p>“Murder!” yelled the professor, as he fell in a heap -at the feet of the Yankee; “the thing has bitten off my -foot!”</p> - -<p>“I guess not, professor; he only nipped off ther heel -of yer shoe. Great haystacks! but that was a narrar -escape, though! I didn’t know you was so ’tarnal -heavy.”</p> - -<p>As soon as the half-drowned man found that he was -not injured, he got mad, and shaking his fist under Haypole’s -nose, said:</p> - -<p>“Martin, if you ever let such a thing as that occur -again, I’ll discharge you on the spot!”</p> - -<p>“Now, don’t git mad, old man; you won’t discharge -me, you know you won’t. Why, thunderation! You -couldn’t git along without me.”</p> - -<p>“It makes no difference; the whole thing was your -fault. If you had not made such an ass of yourself by -pushing the boat so hard against the bank, I would not -have fallen overboard at all. Then the idea of your standing -here laughing at me when the alligator was coming -after me with all his might. You think you are very -funny, Martin Haypole; and I’ll tell you what I have a -great notion of doing.”</p> - -<p>“What?” asked the Yankee, showing just a slight tinge -of passion.</p> - -<p>“I have a great mind of thrashing you.”</p> - -<p>“You had better not try it, professor. I never seen -that man yet as could do that in a square rough and -tumble.”</p> - -<p>Whack!</p> - -<p>The enraged professor struck his employee a smart -blow on the face with his open hand.</p> - -<p>“Thunder and lightning!” howled the Yankee; “I can’t -stand that, even if you do be my boss.”</p> - -<p>He made a sudden dive forward and seized Prof. Remington<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_3">[3]</a></span> -Easy by the collar, and prepared to stand him -on his head.</p> - -<p>But the fat man was still mad, and he ducked down and -seized his opponent by his long legs.</p> - -<p>Then each strove to force the other to the bottom of -the boat.</p> - -<p>“Drat your tarnal hide! I’ll wallop you, anyhow, -now,” exclaimed Haypole.</p> - -<p>He let out his full strength, and down went the fat -professor, with him on top.</p> - -<p>But as they struck the boat gave a lurch, and overboard -went both of them.</p> - -<p>And the alligator, who was still hovering about the -place, opened wide his jaws and swam toward the two -struggling forms, who were each striving to see who could -shout “Murder!” the loudest.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_II_AN_ACCEPTED_PROPOSITION">CHAPTER II.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">AN ACCEPTED PROPOSITION.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>“Dick this is a pretty wild spot, isn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“Well, I should say so, Leo; and not only wild, but -dangerous, as well.”</p> - -<p>“Dangerous? Why, you are not afraid of the ’gators, -are you?”</p> - -<p>“Not exactly; but then there are other things besides -alligators to look out for in this region.”</p> - -<p>The two speakers were young men, eighteen or nineteen -years of age.</p> - -<p>They were seated upon the trunk of a fallen tree, on a -small island, situated at the lower end of Lake Okechobee, -Florida.</p> - -<p>A few feet from them a negro lad was busily engaged -in cooking a haunch of meat over a brightly burning fire.</p> - -<p>The first speaker was Leo Malvern, the son of a -wealthy St. Augustine merchant, and his companion was -his cousin, Dick Vincey, of New York City.</p> - -<p>Dick had come to the South to spend the fall and winter -with his relatives, and his cousin had proposed that -the two should make a trip as far as the Everglades.</p> - -<p>Both liked adventure, and the idea of penetrating -into that unexplored region pleased them to a great extent.</p> - -<p>They procured all necessary supplies needful for such -an undertaking, and set out for their destination, after -traveling as far as they could by rail.</p> - -<p>The young negro who was engaged in preparing their -evening meal—for it was near sunset—was a comical-looking -personage, to say the least.</p> - -<p>He was not as black as some of his race, but the spread -of his nose and mouth, and the habitual grin on his face -gave him a decidedly humorous appearance.</p> - -<p>He had lived at the home of Leo Malvern’s folks since -his earliest infancy, and was a faithful servant.</p> - -<p>This interesting young coon, who is to figure as one -of the characters in our story, was known as Lucky.</p> - -<p>He never knew any other name, and, consequently, was -satisfied.</p> - -<p>Like the majority of his people, he loved a banjo, and -had brought one along on the trip for the amusement of -himself and his two young masters, as he chose to call -the boys.</p> - -<p>“Is supper ready?” asked Dick, as he noticed that the -darky was looking at them.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sah; it am all done. Ready for ter dive in, you -bet,” was the reply, accompanied by a broad grin.</p> - -<p>“All right,” said Leo Malvern; “we may as well eat, -then.”</p> - -<p>The two boys now made their way to the white cloth -spread upon the ground, and prepared to do justice to -the tempting meal before them.</p> - -<p>The odor of coffee and roasted possum made them -hungry, although their appetites were not lacking, by any -means.</p> - -<p>But just as they were about to attack the tempting -morsels, the sounds of an angry discussion were heard in -the near vicinity.</p> - -<p>Leo and Dick sprang to their feet at a bound and seized -their rifles.</p> - -<p>Their canoe was but a few feet distant, and it was -but the work of a minute to spring into it and push off -in the direction the sounds came from.</p> - -<p>Up to this moment they had judged they were the only -human beings in this out-of-the-way place.</p> - -<p>But now it seemed that they were not. The voices -were those of two men in a dispute, and the boys determined -to catch a glimpse of their owners.</p> - -<p>Dick paddled with all his might, while Leo held his -rifle ready for instant use, in case those they heard might -be enemies.</p> - -<p>Rounding a bend, they suddenly came in sight of a -small sailboat and two struggling men.</p> - -<p>It was the <em>Maid of the Marsh</em>, and the two men were -Prof. Remington Easy and the Yankee.</p> - -<p>While the canoe containing the boys was yet a hundred -feet away from the boat, the two men suddenly fell -overboard.</p> - -<p>Then it was that they first observed the alligator making -for them.</p> - -<p>As the professor and Martin Haypole arose to the surface -and began shouting lustily for help, Leo raised his -rifle to his shoulder.</p> - -<p>Crack!</p> - -<p>As the report rang out the hungry alligator ceased his -forward progress and began floundering about in the -muddy water.</p> - -<p>The bullet had pierced his right eye, and in less than -half a minute it expired.</p> - -<p>Meanwhile the Yankee succeeded in grasping the gunwale -of the <em>Maid of the Marsh</em>, and at length drew himself -safely on board.</p> - -<p>Then he hastily lifted his employer from the water, -after which he gazed pantingly in the direction of the -approaching canoe.</p> - -<p>“Much obliged to yer, boys,” said he, addressing our -two young friends. “Whichever of ye it was that plugged -that ugly critter are a good shot, swan if he ain’t!”</p> - -<p>Leo and Dick at once perceived that the men were not -likely to prove enemies, so they lost no time in urging -their canoe to the side of the sailboat.</p> - -<p>“Glad to meet you, young gentlemen!” exclaimed the -professor, rubbing his hands. “I thought us two were -the only ones in this wild place. I am glad that such -is not the case, though, I assure you. For had it not been -for you, both Haypole and myself would surely have -been devoured by that ferocious monster. All on account -of his pig-headedness, too.”</p> - -<p>“Now, see here, professor,” put in the Yankee, “I ain’t -a-goin’ ter quarrel with you ag’in under no consideration. -This oughter be a lesson for us both. Why, I swan<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_4">[4]</a></span> -ter Guinea! that little foolishness nearly cost us both our -nat’ral lives! Come aboard, boys; I’ve got some fine, -old Medford rum here, an’ gosh! if I don’t stand treat.”</p> - -<p>The smell of the blood from the dead alligator was -drawing others to the spot, and both Leo and Dick deemed -it advisable to board the boat.</p> - -<p>They at once clambered over the gunwale of the <em>Maid -of the Marsh</em>, and then, tying their canoe to the stern, -questioned the professor and Haypole as to where they -had come from, and what they were doing there.</p> - -<p>In a very matter-of-fact way Prof. Easy related his -whole story, word for word, and in conclusion said:</p> - -<p>“Now, then, young gentlemen, tell us how we came to -find you in this dangerous and unhealthy place.”</p> - -<p>It did not take Dick Vincey long to do this, and when -he had finished all four seemed glad that the meeting -had taken place.</p> - -<p>“Leo Malvern and Dick Vincey, eh?” said Prof. Easy. -“Well, I’ll tell you both bluntly that I like you. I am -now going to make a proposition to you, which you can -accept or decline as you see fit.”</p> - -<p>“What is it?” asked Leo.</p> - -<p>“I would like to have you accompany me on my exploring -trip. You are both made of the right sort of -material for such an undertaking; and, if my theory -proves correct, you will assist me in making one of the -greatest discoveries the world has ever known.”</p> - -<p>“Before we give you an answer I would suggest that -you move your boat over to our island, just beyond the -bend. We have a darky there who has supper waiting -for us, and we are both hungry. Besides, we have a fire -burning there, and it is getting dark. I think it will be -pleasanter for all hands,” observed Leo.</p> - -<p>“A good idee,” said Haypole. “Here, boys, is ther -Medford rum I spoke about; have some?”</p> - -<p>His offer was declined, greatly to his astonishment.</p> - -<p>“Great haystacks!” he exclaimed, swallowing a big -mouthful of the liquor; “this stuff won’t hurt ye any -more’n apple cider.”</p> - -<p>The longer Leo and Dick remained in the company of -the two men, the better they liked them.</p> - -<p>There was something about Prof. Easy that was bound -to make him friends wherever he went, and Martin Haypole—well, -he was one of those comical, unsophisticated -people whom almost everybody likes.</p> - -<p>Dick grasped a pole and assisted to shove the boat -out into the stream, and thence to the little island, where -Lucky, the darky, was anxiously awaiting the return of -the two boys.</p> - -<p>When he saw the sailboat approaching through the -gathering darkness, he uttered a cry of alarm and hastily -seized his rifle, which stood against a tree.</p> - -<p>“Hold on, Lucky! it is all right,” shouted Leo.</p> - -<p>“Fo’ de Lor’ sakes! Whar did youse done git de -boat, Massa Leo?” asked the darky.</p> - -<p>“We found her out here with two men in her,” returned -Dick, as the prow of the craft struck the little island.</p> - -<p>A line was thrown out, which Lucky quickly tied to a -tree, and then the four sprang out upon the ground.</p> - -<p>The darky still had the possum and coffee warm, and, -as there was enough to go around, all hands did ample -justice to the meal.</p> - -<p>When supper was finished, Leo and Dick thought over -the professor’s proposition, and, after a while, concluded -to accept it.</p> - -<p>The five sat about the fire for a long while, chatting -over the matter, and finally, when they began to get -drowsy, Leo suggested that they should turn in upon -the bottom of the boat, leaving one man on guard for -the first part of the night, and when his time was up, to -make a change.</p> - -<p>“I think it advisable to do this,” said he, “for we can’t -tell what might happen while we slept.”</p> - -<p>“A good idea,” promptly returned the professor. “Martin -will take the first watch.”</p> - -<p>“I will, sartin,” said the Yankee.</p> - -<p>“And I’ll take second,” put in Dick. “To-morrow night -some one else can have a show.”</p> - -<p>This seemed to be satisfactory, so all turned in save -Haypole, who, rifle in hand, sat down upon the ground -near the boat, with his back to a tree.</p> - -<p>He kept the fire burning brightly to keep prowling animals -away, and listened to the regular breathing of his -companions, who were soon fast asleep.</p> - -<p>The hours flitted by.</p> - -<p>Martin Haypole’s time was nearly up, and he was -still seated in the position he had taken on commencing -his watch.</p> - -<p>Up to this time he had remained wide awake, but now -he began dozing.</p> - -<p>Suddenly he was brought to his full senses by hearing -the crackling of a twig at his elbow.</p> - -<p>The Yankee glanced hastily up, and was surprised to -see the figure of a man within two feet of him.</p> - -<p>Before he could make a move the stranger seized the -rifle from his hands, and bounded from the spot with -the speed of an antelope.</p> - -<p>“Hey!” exclaimed Haypole, springing to his feet and -firing his revolver at the retreating form. “Who in -thunderation be you, anyhow?”</p> - -<p>But a splash told him that the man had taken to the -water.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_III_THE_STONE_CUBE_AND_THE_OBELISK">CHAPTER III.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">THE STONE CUBE AND THE OBELISK.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Three weeks later we find Prof. Remington Easy and -his exploring party in the very heart of the great Everglades.</p> - -<p>Had they not been possessed of a vast amount of pluck -and endurance they would never have reached this far.</p> - -<p>But to turn back was strictly out of the question to -them, and this, coupled with the fact that they were completely -fitted out for such an undertaking, was the secret -of their success.</p> - -<p>As Prof. Easy had expected, they found the central -position of the swamp less dangerous to traverse. It -seemed to be upon higher and more solid ground, and -there was less water, and, consequently, less alligators to -look out for.</p> - -<p>It is a beautiful morning upon which we find them -camped in a very picturesque spot.</p> - -<p>The air seems purer than at any time since they entered -the recesses of the unexplored region, and all appear -happy and contented.</p> - -<p>The stranger and his dog have not been seen during -all this time, nor has any other human being, outside of -their own party.</p> - -<p>Each one of the swamp explorers has lost more or less -flesh, though it cannot be said that Martin Haypole’s -loss, in that respect, amounts to much.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_5">[5]</a></span></p> - -<p>Though a native of the Southern clime, Lucky has suffered -the most.</p> - -<p>He is worn down to a mere shadow, and had it not -been for the professor’s store of medicines he would certainly -have found a grave in the swamp.</p> - -<p>As it is, he has just about pulled through by the “skin -of his teeth,” as the saying goes.</p> - -<p>Leo Malvern has just shot a swamp deer, and they -are busily engaged in preparing some of the meat for -their breakfast.</p> - -<p>“Well, professor,” said the young fellow, looking up -from his task, “I can’t say that we have made any great -discovery yet, and I guess we are pretty near the heart -of the Everglades.”</p> - -<p>“I haven’t given up yet,” was the reply. “Here, examine -this and tell me what you think of it.”</p> - -<p>He produced a block of stone about two or three -inches square from his pocket as he spoke.</p> - -<p>Leo laid down the knife with which he was skinning -the animal he had slain, and took the object in question -in his hand.</p> - -<p>“I found that lying upon the ground a few minutes -ago,” went on the professor. “Have any of you lost it?”</p> - -<p>He was promptly answered in the negative by all -hands.</p> - -<p>“Nature certainly never formed that,” said Leo. “Ah! -there are marks upon it!”</p> - -<p>The boy was right. Upon one side of the stone were -several cuts, resembling, for all the world, Chinese hieroglyphics.</p> - -<p>“That’s very strange,” remarked Dick.</p> - -<p>“We are on the eve of a great discovery—mark my -words, gentlemen,” said the professor, in a manner of -excitement.</p> - -<p>“I don’t see why,” ventured the Yankee.</p> - -<p>“You don’t? How do you suppose this thing came -here, then?”</p> - -<p>“Somebody has been here afore, most likely.”</p> - -<p>“That’s it, exactly; somebody has been here before, and -those who have must certainly live in this neighborhood. -Let us look about and see if we can find anything more.”</p> - -<p>“Humph!” retorted Haypole; “suppose we do find -something. What’ll it amount to, anyhow?”</p> - -<p>No one vouchsafed a reply, and leaving Lucky to get -the morning meal ready, Leo, Dick and the professor -began carefully searching about the ground.</p> - -<p>At length the Yankee became interested, and joined -them.</p> - -<p>But they looked about the spot where the professor had -found the little cube for full half an hour, and not another -thing could they find that seemed out of the way -in the place.</p> - -<p>“Well,” observed Dick, as they were called to breakfast, -“I would keep the cube, professor, if I were you, and -be very careful not to lose it.”</p> - -<p>“Oh! you may rest assured that I will,” was the reply.</p> - -<p>After the remains of the breakfast were cleared away, -Leo arose to his feet and signified his intention of climbing -a tree to see how the land lay.</p> - -<p>Selecting a good, tall one, which was at the same time -easy to climb, he went up.</p> - -<p>The tree was nearly a hundred feet high, and the -boy did not pause until he reached the top.</p> - -<p>Then he prepared to take in the surrounding country.</p> - -<p>The sun, which seldom found its way to the ground in -the swamp, was shining brightly all around him, and Leo -felt his spirits rise as if by magic.</p> - -<p>“This is fine,” he muttered to himself; “but I can’t -see much besides tree tops and cane brakes, after all. But -it is worth ten dollars to have the sun shine on you five -minutes like this. Ah, by George!”</p> - -<p>He had just turned his gaze in a southerly direction as -the words left his lips.</p> - -<p>No wonder he uttered the exclamation.</p> - -<p>Leo Malvern was looking upon something besides trees, -cane brakes and pools of muddy water now.</p> - -<p>About a mile from the tree in which he was perched he -plainly saw a stone obelisk, which looked to be in the -neighborhood of forty feet high.</p> - -<p>Now, Leo knew this could not have grown there; so, -locating the exact direction, he began descending the -tree to notify his companions of the important discovery -he had made.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” he shouted, when he reached the ground. -“I’ve made the greatest discovery yet!”</p> - -<p>“What is it?” exclaimed the professor, excitedly.</p> - -<p>“There is a stone pillar, or something, about a mile -south of us.”</p> - -<p>“What!”</p> - -<p>“Exactly what I say. Come on; we will go to it.”</p> - -<p>Even Haypole became very much excited, and he hurried -along after Leo as fast as any of his companions.</p> - -<p>“I shan’t be astonished at anything we may find,” said -Prof. Easy. “Hundreds of years ago it was supposed -that a fountain of youth existed somewhere in these -parts; and if that does not, I am sure something else -equally as wonderful does.”</p> - -<p>They had probably made half the distance to the -obelisk, when the baying of a dog suddenly came to their -ears.</p> - -<p>“What in thunderation is that?” exclaimed the -Yankee.</p> - -<p>“It is a dog, if I am not mistaken,” replied Leo. “Be -cautious, all hands, there is no use in our running headlong -into danger.”</p> - -<p>With their weapons ready for instant use, they hurried -cautiously ahead through the tangled mazes of the -swamp.</p> - -<p>They did not hear the dog bark again, though they -listened attentively for it.</p> - -<p>In a few minutes they came in sight of the obelisk that -had attracted Leo’s attention from the top of the tree.</p> - -<p>It seemed to be very ancient in appearance, for in many -places pieces were chipped from it.</p> - -<p>Yet it stood as erect as it had when placed there.</p> - -<p>A tangled mass of vines clung to it, half hiding the -lower part of it.</p> - -<p>After peering carefully about, to make sure that there -was no one around, our friends advanced toward the -huge monument of stone.</p> - -<p>It was a difficult matter to reach its base, for so dense -was the undergrowth that the Yankee had to unsling the -ax from his back and cut their way through.</p> - -<p>At frequent intervals they came to a halt and listened, -but not the least sound could they hear, save the noise -they made themselves.</p> - -<p>“It is rather queer where that dog went to,” said -Dick.</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” replied his cousin, shaking his head.</p> - -<p>“Somethin’ funny’ll happen putty soon—see if it don’t,” -put in Haypole. “I wouldn’t be much surprised to see<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_6">[6]</a></span> -ther ‘old boy’ jump outer that big gravestone, an’ put for -us. I’ll be ding-wizzened! if I don’t begin ter feel -squeamish.”</p> - -<p>“Come; let us force our way through these vines and -get at the base of the obelisk,” spoke up the professor, -pushing his way forward.</p> - -<p>A few minutes later all five stood at the foot of the -immense shaft, panting and sweating from their exertions.</p> - -<p>As they tore the vines aside, they saw it was covered, -at regular intervals, with square bits of stone, exactly like -the one found by Prof. Easy.</p> - -<p>“Ah!” exclaimed the learned man, as he saw this; -“this cube I found evidently came from here. Let us see -if we can find where it belongs.”</p> - -<p>Leo and Dick quickly produced their knives and began -cutting away the vines, while the professor put on his -glasses, preparatory to making the examination.</p> - -<p>They cleared away all around the base, which was about -eighteen feet square, and just as they finished, Dick’s eye -lit upon one of the places where a cube was missing.</p> - -<p>“Here is the spot,” said he. “Now, professor, let’s -see if the one you have fits here.”</p> - -<p>The professor stepped forward and produced the cube -from his pocket.</p> - -<p>He was just about to place it in the opening when a -rifle shot rang out close at hand, followed by the baying -of a dog.</p> - -<p>This so startled the man of science that he made an -involuntary move forward, thrusting the cube, as he did -so, squarely into the hole.</p> - -<p>Almost instantly a hidden door flew noiselessly open, -revealing a flight of stone steps, leading downward into -the bowels of the earth.</p> - -<p>A simultaneous cry of surprise left the lips of the -swamp explorers as this remarkable occurrence took place.</p> - -<p>They gazed into the opening for the space of a minute -and no one spoke a word.</p> - -<p>But suddenly they were called to their senses by hearing -a wild cry at their very elbow.</p> - -<p>The next moment a man and a dog rushed through -their midst and sprang down the stairway in the base of -the obelisk.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_IV_WHERE_THE_STAIRS_LED_TO">CHAPTER IV.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">WHERE THE STAIRS LED TO.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Leo Malvern caught but a fleeting glance at the man -and dog as they rushed down the stairs in the base of -the obelisk.</p> - -<p>But what was the stranger fleeing from?</p> - -<p>The swamp explorers glanced around them to find out.</p> - -<p>The next moment they learned to their full satisfaction.</p> - -<p>In the little clearing, a few yards beyond them, a balloon -suddenly settled.</p> - -<p>There was but one occupant of the basket, or car, and -he was a stern-visaged man of perhaps forty-two.</p> - -<p>It was evident that he had not yet seen our friends, for, -as the balloon, which was now about half collapsed, settled -upon the earth, he sprang from the basket and rushed -in the direction taken by the man and dog.</p> - -<p>A sudden thought came in Dick Vincey’s head.</p> - -<p>“Hide—quick!” he whispered to his companions. “He -will most likely enter the opening and go on down.”</p> - -<p>In the twinkling of an eye all hands sprang to the -other side of the obelisk and concealed themselves in a -thicket.</p> - -<p>They were not a moment too soon. The next instant -the man who had so strangely landed in that wild spot -rushed up to the base of the obelisk and came to an -abrupt halt.</p> - -<p>An exclamation of surprise left his lips as he beheld the -opening in the stone shaft.</p> - -<p>“By heavens!” he exclaimed, loud enough for the -swamp explorers to hear; “Reginald Lacy, you shall not -escape me, even if I have to follow you into the very -center of the earth!”</p> - -<p>Then he boldly entered the doorway and began descending -the stone steps.</p> - -<p>Five minutes later our friends made their way to the -entrance again and listened for some sound.</p> - -<p>But they could hear nothing.</p> - -<p>“I am going to make a suggestion,” suddenly said Leo.</p> - -<p>“What is it?” asked his cousin.</p> - -<p>“Let us go down the steps and see what has become -of those who have already gone down.”</p> - -<p>“Agreed!” exclaimed the professor, who was ready for -anything.</p> - -<p>“Oh! for de good Lor’ sakes! don’t go down dere. De -debbil am dere, suah!” whined Lucky, in a frightened -manner.</p> - -<p>“Keep still, coon, and don’t git skeered. We may as -well go as far and see as much as we kin, since we have -got ter this dod-rotted country. I, for one, are satisfied -to go down them steps.”</p> - -<p>The Yankee gave a contemptuous glance at the darky -as he spoke, and then nodded for Leo to lead on.</p> - -<p>Dick had not passed his opinion on the question yet, -but that he was perfectly willing need scarcely be said.</p> - -<p>But at the same time it occurred to him that they ought -to take some sort of a light with them.</p> - -<p>They had left their supplies at the point where they had -been compelled to use the ax in the thicket.</p> - -<p>Dick hastened to the spot and got a small lantern, -which was all that was left of three that they had brought -along with them.</p> - -<p>When he reached the obelisk again his companions had -already entered the doorway, and were waiting for him -on the steps.</p> - -<p>It was but the work of a moment to strike a match -and light the lantern; and then the boy followed them -down into the place beyond.</p> - -<p>Down they went, for at least a hundred steps, and the -end of the flight was not reached yet.</p> - -<p>Another hundred, and still it appeared the same.</p> - -<p>“I wonder how many miles we have got ter go afore -we git ter ther bottom?” said the Yankee.</p> - -<p>“Have patience, Martin,” replied Prof. Easy. “We are -on the eve of a great discovery—mark my word for it!”</p> - -<p>“Humph! I heerd ye say that same thing a good -many times before. But, by the great boots in ther haymow, -I stepped on somethin’ alive jist then!”</p> - -<p>“A ground hog!” exclaimed Dick, holding up the lantern. -“How in thunder did it ever get there, I wonder?”</p> - -<p>“If it can live in here, I am sure we can a little longer. -Let us proceed,” returned the professor, quietly.</p> - -<p>Once more they began descending the steps.</p> - -<p>During all this time they had not heard the least sound -from those who had preceded them.</p> - -<p>Probably one hundred and fifty steps more were descended, -and then they reached a wide passage.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_7">[7]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Come,” said Leo, leading the way. “We have struck -level traveling at last.”</p> - -<p>The swamp explorers had not proceeded over three -hundred yards, before they saw daylight ahead.</p> - -<p>It seemed rather strange that it should be daylight, but -it was, nevertheless.</p> - -<p>With all possible speed they hastened along the passage.</p> - -<p>Two hundred yards more and a wonderful sight met -their gaze.</p> - -<p>They were emerging into a vast tract of country many -feet below the earth’s crust.</p> - -<p>In front of them was the beginning of a long crack, -which extended a couple of miles or more, and all along -the edges of this the water streamed down in the form of -a cascade of unlimited extent.</p> - -<p>The sunlight came in through the crack, which was -probably a quarter of a mile in width, and lighted up the -place.</p> - -<p>All sorts of vegetation flourished on the place beneath -the opening above; but beyond this our friends could -perceive nothing on account of the falling water and the -mist arising from the streams in which it fell.</p> - -<p>“Wonderful!” exclaimed the professor.</p> - -<p>“Darned if it ain’t wonderful,” assented Haypole.</p> - -<p>“Who ever imagined that such a place as this existed?” -said Leo.</p> - -<p>“We are now under the great Everglades of Florida. -It remains for us to find out what sort of place it is,” -spoke up Dick Vincey.</p> - -<p>“I agree with you there,” returned Prof. Easy. “Come, -let us be moving. It is strange what has become of the -man and dog and their pursuer.”</p> - -<p>They stepped off to the left, and kept walking until -they emerged from the mist, which seemed to settle back -on either side of the opening.</p> - -<p>As they left it behind them they saw that only a sort -of twilight prevailed in and about the underground place.</p> - -<p>Then a startling thing occurred.</p> - -<p>A body of men suddenly appeared from the numerous -galleries, to be seen on their left, and rushed toward them.</p> - -<p>There must have been fully a hundred of them, and all -were attired in long gowns of some dark-colored material, -and were barefooted and without any head covering.</p> - -<p>The strange horde had the appearance of Turks, both -in manner and looks.</p> - -<p>The moment Leo and Dick beheld them, they placed -their rifles to their shoulders.</p> - -<p>Their action was quickly followed by their companions, -and then Leo exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Halt! We mean you no harm!”</p> - -<p>But the command was entirely disregarded. The crowd -of men rushed at them with a quicker pace, if possible, -brandishing spears and bows and arrows.</p> - -<p>When within about fifty feet of the intruders, they -came to a sudden halt and sent a flight of arrows at -them.</p> - -<p>One of these found lodgment in the fleshy part of -Martin Haypole’s leg, and another went through the -crown of the professor’s hat.</p> - -<p>Leo and Dick thought it high time for them to act.</p> - -<p>Dropping to their knees, they began firing into the -ranks of the queerly attired strangers.</p> - -<p>Crack! crack!</p> - -<p>The reports rang out in rapid succession, and at almost -every shot a man fell.</p> - -<p>At first they seemed to be staggered and amazed, but -they soon rallied and answered the rifle shots, by another -flight of arrows.</p> - -<p>It now behooved our friends to look for a place of -cover.</p> - -<p>A few yards distant was the mouth of a gallery or -passage, and at the command of Leo Malvern they -rushed for this with all possible speed.</p> - -<p>The inhabitants of the underground place came after -them with all their might, uttering, for the first time, loud -yells of triumph.</p> - -<p>“Hurry up!” cried Dick; “if we can reach the mouth -of that passage we’ll give ’em fits.”</p> - -<p>The arrows kept flying all around them, and Lucky, -the darky, was wounded in the arm.</p> - -<p>A minute more and the spot was reached in safety.</p> - -<p>“Now!” exclaimed Leo, “give it to them! Everybody -fire as fast as he can.”</p> - -<p>The next instant five rifles began sending a veritable -hailstorm of bullets.</p> - -<p>Down went seven or eight of the savage barbarians, as -the professor chose to term them, and several more began -hopping about like mad from the wounds they had received.</p> - -<p>Leo expected to see them turn and flee now, since he -and his companions had reached a place where they could -most likely hold their own.</p> - -<p>But no! They kept on shooting their arrows, which, -by the way, did our friends not the least bit of harm, as -they had crouched behind a huge bowlder.</p> - -<p>But in spite of the determined stand our friends made, -they were doomed to defeat.</p> - -<p>Suddenly they heard a pattering of feet behind them, -and, on turning, beheld a crowd of the savages coming -through the passage.</p> - -<p>They were between two fires!</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_V_THE_DANCE_OF_DEATH">CHAPTER V.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">THE DANCE OF DEATH.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>“God help us!” exclaimed Prof. Easy, as he saw the -strange inhabitants of the underground place rushing for -them from both front and rear.</p> - -<p>But “God helps those who help themselves,” and both -Leo Malvern and Dick Vincey were fully aware of this. -They made up their minds that they would not be killed -or captured until they had used every effort to drive away -their enemies.</p> - -<p>Brave, young fellows! But what could they hope to -accomplish against such fearful odds?</p> - -<p>Martin Haypole was the only man they had to stick -to them now, as both the professor and Lucky at once -threw down their weapons when they observed the horde -approaching through the passage.</p> - -<p>“Keep on firing!” shouted Leo, “and when they close -on us use your revolvers.”</p> - -<p>“No—no!” replied the professor; “let us surrender. It -is the best thing to do, I think.”</p> - -<p>“Never!” exclaimed Dick, and his reply was echoed by -his cousin and the intrepid Yankee.</p> - -<p>Nearer approached the swarming savages, and presently -our friends were hemmed in from all possible means -of escape.</p> - -<p>It seemed that every man that fell had two or three -to take his place.</p> - -<p>At length there was a combined rush from all quarters,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_8">[8]</a></span> -and the swamp explorers were forced to the ground -and made prisoners.</p> - -<p>This caused their hopes to rise a trifle.</p> - -<p>They were not to be killed at present, and that was -one consoling thought.</p> - -<p>Their captors seemed to be very gleeful over the fact -of having made them prisoners, and at once proceeded to -bind their arms behind them, after having first divested -them of their weapons.</p> - -<p>Then the five swamp explorers were lifted to their -feet in their deplorable condition.</p> - -<p>“I wonder what in thunderation the scamps are a-goin’ -ter do with us,” observed the Yankee.</p> - -<p>“The Lord only knows,” groaned Prof. Easy, who now -was thoroughly frightened.</p> - -<p>“We will have to trust to luck,” said Leo.</p> - -<p>“We is done gwine ter be killed—’deed we is!” exclaimed -Lucky, in a despondent tone.</p> - -<p>“Wait until you are sure of that before you say it -again,” replied Dick.</p> - -<p>Then turning to the crowd surrounding them, he continued:</p> - -<p>“Come! what are you standing there for? Why don’t -you take us to the place you intend to, and have done -with it?”</p> - -<p>It seemed that he was understood, for without any further -ado two men seized each of the captives, and the -whole crowd started off down the passage.</p> - -<p>It was rather dark in the tunnel-like place, and when -they had traversed about three hundred yards, our friends -were unable to see any of their surroundings.</p> - -<p>But in a very few minutes they saw light ahead of -them, and objects again became distinguishable.</p> - -<p>A cry of wonder broke from the lips of the five as -they were marched out into the light. If they had been -surprised when they first entered the underground place, -they were even more than surprised now.</p> - -<p>They found themselves in a natural cave of many acres -in extent, in which was a small village of stone huts.</p> - -<p>The queerest thing about the place was that the top of -the cave—if cave it could really be called—was entirely -open in a circle of six or seven hundred yards in diameter. -This admitted both light and rain, and hence it was that -an unlimited supply of vegetation could be seen about.</p> - -<p>The opening above was many feet from the ground -upon which the stone huts were built, and there was no -possible means of getting to the level ground above without -the aid of an immense ladder.</p> - -<p>“Well, this jist beats the Jews!” ejaculated Haypole. -“This place looks like a big watermelon hollered out and -one of ther ends cut off. I think if I knowed that song -called ‘Down in a Coal Mine,’ I’d sing it.”</p> - -<p>The prisoners were led along until they came to the -largest building visible to them, and there a halt was -called.</p> - -<p>There were no doors to any of the huts, which showed -that the inhabitants were not afraid of being robbed by -their neighbors. The crowd who had charge of our -friends faced the main doorway of the building they had -halted in front of, and then clapped their hands.</p> - -<p>Almost immediately a rustle was heard, and the figure -of a female came out.</p> - -<p>As soon as she appeared every person in sight, save the -five captives, dropped to their knees and turned their faces -to the ground.</p> - -<p>With a look of wonderment upon their faces the swamp -explorers eyed the girl—for she did not look to be over -eighteen at the most—and marveled at her rare beauty.</p> - -<p>She was attired in a trailing, white gown of some -gauzy material, and her face was partly concealed by a -fold of the same, which was thrown around her shoulders -and across her mouth.</p> - -<p>The look from her dazzling bright eyes showed that -she was surprised at seeing the strangers.</p> - -<p>But only for an instant did her gaze rest upon them.</p> - -<p>Turning quickly to those who had brought them there, -she clapped her hands three times.</p> - -<p>All arose to their feet and saluted her.</p> - -<p>Then, to the surprise of Prof. Easy, one of the men -stepped forward and began addressing the girl in Spanish.</p> - -<p>“Oh, queen,” said he, “here are five more people who -have dared find their way into the land of Hez. What -shall be their doom? Shall they be confined in the magic -chamber with the other prisoner to witness the dance of -death, or shall they be slaughtered at once?”</p> - -<p>“Conduct them to the magic chamber,” said the queen, -with an imperious wave of her hand.</p> - -<p>She turned to enter the building, when the professor, -who could speak Spanish fluently, exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Most gracious queen, listen a moment, please!”</p> - -<p>At this the girl turned as if she had been stung, and -the fold of her garment, becoming loosened, fell from her -face, revealing the most beautiful countenance our friends -had ever looked upon, or even dreamed of.</p> - -<p>“Heavens!” thought Dick Vincey, “what a beautiful -creature.”</p> - -<p>The queen had fixed her eyes upon the face of the -professor.</p> - -<p>“Were you addressing me, sir?” she demanded.</p> - -<p>“I was, oh, queen,” he returned. “I would like to say, -in behalf of my companions and myself, that if we did -wrong in coming to this place, we were not aware of it. -Surely you will not condemn us to death for making such -a mistake.”</p> - -<p>“Enough! Away with them to the magic chamber, and -let them witness the dance of death.”</p> - -<p>With these words she swept gracefully into the house, -and the Hezzians, as we shall now call the natives, seized -the prisoners and led them from the spot.</p> - -<p>None of the party, save Prof. Easy, could understand -any other language than their own, and they were all -very curious as to what was going to be done with them.</p> - -<p>“What did she say when you spoke to her, professor?” -asked Leo.</p> - -<p>“She has sentenced us to be shut up in a place called -the magic chamber, where there is now a captive already, -and witness the dance of death. What will follow I am -not prepared to say. That beautiful but hard-hearted -creature is the queen of this strange country, and what -she says seems to be law.”</p> - -<p>“She don’t look as though she would have us killed,” -observed Haypole. “I seen her castin’ sheep’s-eyes at -Dick while we was a-standin’ there. Ther only thing -that’ll save us is for him ter make love to her.”</p> - -<p>“I’d do that willingly enough, if I thought it would -save our lives,” said Dick.</p> - -<p>Leo and the Yankee laughed in spite of their situation.</p> - -<p>It struck them that Dick would be glad to pay his -attentions to the beautiful queen, even if it would not benefit -them.</p> - -<p>But there was no time for further conversation now.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_9">[9]</a></span> -The Hezzians had halted at what appeared to be the extreme -end of the cave.</p> - -<p>Half a dozen of them used their combined efforts to -roll a rock aside, which revealed a small opening.</p> - -<p>Into this they filed, taking our friends with them.</p> - -<p>It was dark as pitch inside, but at a word from one of -the men a light suddenly appeared.</p> - -<p>How it came so quickly our friends were at first at a -loss to understand, but in a few seconds it was made plain -to them.</p> - -<p>As their eyes became accustomed to the ghostly glare -the light made, they began looking around them.</p> - -<p>They found that the place into which they had been -conducted was a cave of about one hundred feet square.</p> - -<p>In the center, upon the floor, a man attired in the -habiliments of civilization sat, with his arms bound behind -him.</p> - -<p>A single glance sufficed to show the swamp explorers -that it was the man who had left the balloon and started -down the stairs in quest of the one with the dog.</p> - -<p>He looked up when he saw men of his own appearance -approaching, and a smile lit up his countenance.</p> - -<p>The five prisoners were at once placed at the side of -this man, and then those who had brought them thither -immediately left the cave.</p> - -<p>Then it was that they first saw what caused the light.</p> - -<p>A girl, who was almost as beautiful as the queen herself, -had entered through a passage at the other side of -the cave at about the same time they had.</p> - -<p>She carried a blazing torch, which she waved to and -fro in a weird sort of fashion.</p> - -<p>A heavy band of metal was about her neck, and upon -her wrists bracelets glittered and flashed in the rays of -light.</p> - -<p>She began walking in a circle about the six prisoners.</p> - -<p>When she had made the circuit five times, a low, grinding -music struck up from some unseen place near by.</p> - -<p>Almost instantly a slight commotion was heard, and -fully forty girls, attired the same as the first, entered the -cave.</p> - -<p>Each one carried a lighted torch, and the flame of each -shed forth a light of different hue.</p> - -<p>As soon as they had placed themselves in position, the -hidden music changed to a quick air, and they began to -dance in a wild, graceful sort of way.</p> - -<p>For five minutes the girls kept up the dance, and then -a change occurred.</p> - -<p>An ominous, rattling sound was heard, and a score of -human skeletons dropped from above and stood upright -upon the ground.</p> - -<p>Then the dance began in earnest, the skeletons joining -in, it seemed.</p> - -<p>The girls struck up a chant in time with the music, -which had again changed, and began gliding about, right -and left, with their grewsome partners.</p> - -<p>Lucky, the darky, whose nerves were not overstrong, -fainted away, while the rest of the party felt an icy chill -gliding down their backs.</p> - -<p>Probably the least interested one in the party was the -man who had been in the cave when our friends entered.</p> - -<p>He gazed at the scene with a look of indifference on -his face, and even smiled when the girls grasped the -hideous relics of humanity about their fleshless waists and -whirled them around.</p> - -<p>Round and round spun the dancers, oftentimes nearly -stumbling over the captives upon the floor.</p> - -<p>Suddenly one of the fair dancers got tangled up with -her “partner,” and stumbled headlong over Leo.</p> - -<p>As she did so, the boy heard a metallic ring close beside -him.</p> - -<p>As soon as she arose to her feet and glided away, he -saw a knife lying upon the ground.</p> - -<p>Moving slightly, he kicked Dick gently.</p> - -<p>“What’s up?” asked his cousin, taking his eyes from -the curious scene for a moment.</p> - -<p>“I have found a knife,” was the whispered reply. “I -am going to get hold of it with my teeth and cut your -hands loose.”</p> - -<p>Rolling over on his stomach, he seized the knife by the -handle in a strong grip between his teeth.</p> - -<p>Dick turned so his back was toward Leo, and then the -boy began sawing away at the bonds which held his hands -together.</p> - -<p>It was a difficult job, but Leo was plucky, and presently -he was rewarded by seeing his cousin’s hands free.</p> - -<p>Then it was but the work of a moment for Dick to -liberate him.</p> - -<p>“Now,” said Leo, “cut the rest free.”</p> - -<p>Just as he was about to do so, a crowd of hideous-appearing -men, attired in the skins of various animals, -rushed in the cave, and seizing about half of the dancing -girls, carried them screaming from the spot.</p> - -<p>Then the dance ceased as if by magic.</p> - -<p>There was now but one girl left to each skeleton, and -these placed their fair, white arms about the necks of the -horrible objects.</p> - -<p>The music now clashed into a sound like the shriek of -a doomed soul, and then both girls and skeletons began -to rise slowly in the air.</p> - -<p>“By heavens!” exclaimed Leo, springing to his feet; -“I am going to know the cause of some of this humbug.”</p> - -<p>Springing forward, he seized one of the girls about the -waist and gave a tug downward.</p> - -<p>Then something snapped above them, and down came -the girl, bringing the skeleton with her, knocking the daring -boy flat upon his back.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_VI_ESTO_PERPETUA">CHAPTER VI.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">“ESTO PERPETUA.”</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Leo Malvern sprang to his feet, and seized the girl by -the shoulders.</p> - -<p>“Utter a single cry and I will kill you!” he exclaimed.</p> - -<p>She seemed to understand him, for she did not make -the least effort to cry out.</p> - -<p>“Do you understand what I say?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“I do!” was the reply, in fair English.</p> - -<p>“Then arise to your feet and lead us from this place.”</p> - -<p>“Will you protect me if I get into trouble?”</p> - -<p>“I will—with my life!”</p> - -<p>“Then be it so. Come!”</p> - -<p>The torch which the girl had possessed was still smoldering -upon the floor, and quickly stamping this out, she -seized Leo by the arm, and directed the rest to catch -hold of him for a guide.</p> - -<p>Then she started swiftly across the cave and entered -the mouth of a passage.</p> - -<p>Along a dark, narrow passage they made their way, -until a large, vaultlike chamber was reached.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_10">[10]</a></span></p> - -<p>Here the girl came to a halt, and, placing her hand -upon the shoulder of Leo, said:</p> - -<p>“I have brought you to the burial place of our people. -You will be safe here, for there are hundreds of nooks -and niches to conceal yourselves in. I will go back and -endeavor to find your weapons for you.”</p> - -<p>“But,” said Leo, “I promised to protect you if you got -into trouble. How am I to do so if you leave us?”</p> - -<p>“It matters not; come a few paces this way; I would -say something that is for your ears alone.”</p> - -<p>The boy allowed her to lead him a few yards from his -companions.</p> - -<p>Then the beautiful girl seized him by the hands, and exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Let me tell you what caused me to break the laws of -Hez and lead you from the magic chamber. I saw your -face pictured in a dream a few nights ago, and the dream -led me to believe that I was looking upon the face of my -future lord and master. It was so real, that when I saw -you, when you bade me rise to my feet after pulling me -down with the skeleton, that I could not refuse to aid -you. I believe in dreams, do you not?”</p> - -<p>“Well—er—sometimes,” replied Leo, completely staggered -at the girl’s speech.</p> - -<p>“I knew you did. Then listen: I swear to protect you -and your friends as long as you remain in the land of -Hez. Now, tell me your name, my future lord and -master.”</p> - -<p>“Leo Malvern.”</p> - -<p>“’Tis well. I shall ever remember it. Mine is Azurma. -I am a member of the royal family.”</p> - -<p>The girl kissed his hand fervently and then left the -spot, while Leo groped his way to the side of his companions, -to whom he related what had occurred.</p> - -<p>Prof. Easy then informed Philander Owens as to -who he and his companions were, and why they had -chosen to brave the dangers of the great swamp, after -which all hands lapsed into silence.</p> - -<p>Finally Dick broke it by exclaiming:</p> - -<p>“I don’t see any use of our remaining in this dark -place until that girl comes back. I, for one, am going -back into the place called the magic chamber and light -a torch and see what it is like in there.”</p> - -<p>“Hold on!” exclaimed the professor. “Haven’t you already -seen that it does not pay to be rash? Just have a -little patience and sit down and wait.”</p> - -<p>“I am sorry, but I can’t comply with your request,” returned -the adventurous boy. “I am deeply interested in -the cave where the dance of death took place. Come on; -who is going with me?”</p> - -<p>“Gosh hang it!” exclaimed Haypole; “I’ll go.”</p> - -<p>“Better wait, Dick,” said Leo, who was anxious to -be there when Azurma came back.</p> - -<p>“Oh, that’s all right, old fellow. We won’t run into -any danger. We’ll see you later.”</p> - -<p>With these words, Dick and the Yankee felt their way -along until they came to the passage leading from the -vault.</p> - -<p>Having once found it, they boldly entered and walked -softly along.</p> - -<p>They kept on for fully five minutes, and then it occurred -to Dick that they ought to have entered the magic -chamber by this time.</p> - -<p>He produced a match from his pocket and struck it.</p> - -<p>To his astonishment he found himself in a small, open -square, with four passages branching off in different directions.</p> - -<p>By the flickering light of the match in his companion’s -hand the Yankee saw a torch lying upon the floor.</p> - -<p>Stooping down, he picked it up and lighted it.</p> - -<p>“Now, I guess we will be able ter find ther way,” said -he.</p> - -<p>“I guess so. Ah! what have we here?” exclaimed Dick, -pointing to a smooth rock, upon which were several inscriptions.</p> - -<p>Haypole held the torch nearer, and they saw a long -column of names engraved upon the rock.</p> - -<p>But they were Spanish, and they failed to make them -out.</p> - -<p>Beneath them was a hand with the index finger pointing -to a passage at their right.</p> - -<p>“This must be the way out, Martin,” said Dick. “Come -on; we will follow this passage.”</p> - -<p>“Good enough!” returned the Yankee, and they at once -set out.</p> - -<p>But they soon found that the passage went downward -instead of on a level, as the one they had before traversed.</p> - -<p>However, they did not turn back; the hand upon the -rock pointed that way, and both were anxious to see -what it meant.</p> - -<p>Down they went for fully fifteen minutes, and then -they observed a bright light ahead of them.</p> - -<p>But it was not the light of day that they saw; it was -a sort of pale, greenish tint.</p> - -<p>In a few minutes they emerged into a vast chamber of -a conical shape, which seemed to be lighted by electricity, -though where the seat of the light was located they could -not tell.</p> - -<p>In the center of the conical-shaped cavern was a pool -of crystal water, from which a sparkling fountain shot -upward, sending a myriad of glistening drops scatteringly -through space.</p> - -<p>In the curious light that prevailed the fountain resembled -a monster Roman candle, and the two who gazed -upon the scene for the first time were entranced at the -wonderful spectacle.</p> - -<p>The pool of water rested in a natural basin of rock, -and a slanting floor of white stone stretched out from its -edges.</p> - -<p>After gazing at the fountain for a while, Dick led the -way to the edge of the pool.</p> - -<p>Here, for the first time, he noticed a tablet of stone -which leaned against a bowlder.</p> - -<p>The boy gave a start and pointed to it, at the same time -calling his companion’s attention.</p> - -<p>Upon the tablet was engraved a hand, like the one -they had seen at the point where the four passages met, -and the index finger pointed directly into the pool of -sparkling water.</p> - -<p>Beneath the hand was the rough delineation of a rose in -full bloom, and under all were the words:</p> - -<p class="center">“<span class="smcap">Esto Perpetua.</span>” -</p> - -<p>Dick’s small acquaintance with Latin told him that -<i lang="la" xml:lang="la">esto perpetua</i> meant: “Let it be perpetual,” and he wondered -what it could all mean.</p> - -<p>While he was studying over the subject, a slight noise -was heard in the direction they came from.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p> - -<p>Instinctively he clutched the Yankee by the sleeve, and -both dropped to the ground behind the bowlder against -which the tablet rested.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_VII_THE_LEGEND_OF_HEZ">CHAPTER VII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">THE LEGEND OF HEZ.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Dick and the Yankee had no sooner sought seclusion -behind the bowlder than a man of ragged and unkempt -appearance came from the mouth of the passage with a -dog at his side.</p> - -<p>Both gave a violent start of surprise.</p> - -<p>It was the man and dog who had entered the base of -the obelisk before them.</p> - -<p>The stranger still carried a rifle, and as Haypole saw -this he clutched his companion by the shoulder and exclaimed, -in a low tone:</p> - -<p>“Ther infernal skunk has got my rifle! It sartainly is -he who stole it that night in th’ swamp.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind,” whispered Dick. “Let’s watch him and -see what he is up to.”</p> - -<p>The man, who has been spoken of as Reginald Lacy, -paused near the edge of the pool and looked at his surroundings -with an air of extreme surprise.</p> - -<p>He patted the dog upon the head in an affectionate way -and said:</p> - -<p>“Well, Jupiter, we have struck a wonderful country. -But we are not safe, old fellow—not by any means. -Owens is still upon our track, and he evidently means -business. But he shall never kill me, Jupiter; I may deserve -it, but I will never die at his hands.”</p> - -<p>The dog wagged his tail and crouched at his master’s -feet, who, surveying the clear water before him, went -on:</p> - -<p>“That water looks cool and tempting; I believe I will -take a bath.”</p> - -<p>With that Reginald Lacy began removing his tattered -garments, preparatory to taking a plunge in the crystal -pool.</p> - -<p>In a very short time he was ready, and, walking down -to the edge of the pool, he placed his hand in the water -to test its temperature.</p> - -<p>It must have been perfectly satisfactory, for without -further hesitation he plunged in.</p> - -<p>The dog gazed at his master for a moment and then -followed suit.</p> - -<p>The effect upon the man and dog seemed to be startling.</p> - -<p>They sported about in the crystal water, apparently imbued -with new life and strength.</p> - -<p>“This is glorious!” Dick and the Yankee heard the -man say, as he stood neck deep in the water under the -spray of the fountain.</p> - -<p>The dog answered with yelps of delight as he swam -swiftly about and sported to his heart’s content.</p> - -<p>“By Jove!” whispered Dick, to his companion, “the -water does look inviting; it wouldn’t be a bad idea for us -to take a swim.”</p> - -<p>“I guess I don’t want any of it,” returned the Yankee. -“That dod-rotted water don’t look nat’ral to my eyes. -Look at that feller; he seems ter be gittin’ crazy—gosh! -if he don’t!”</p> - -<p>Reginald Lacy was acting rather queer for a man! -He was cutting up all sorts of boyish antics and laughing -like mad.</p> - -<p>Presently he waded ashore, and, after washing the rags -he had worn, put them on wet, as they were, and entered -the passage again, calling the dog after him.</p> - -<p>As soon as they had disappeared from view, Dick and -Haypole came from behind the bowlder.</p> - -<p>“Let’s follow him, Martin,” said Dick; “maybe he -knows the way out of this place.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” returned the Yankee. “It are about time -we went back to ther place whar we left the professor an’ -ther rest, anyhow.”</p> - -<p>Picking up the torch, which they had thrown upon -the ground when they first entered the wonderful cavern, -Dick lighted it, and they started up the passage after Reginald -Lacy and his dog.</p> - -<p>But they could neither see nor hear any signs of -them as they trudged along, and at length, when they -reached the spot where the four passages met, they were -forced to acknowledge that he had eluded them in some -unexplained manner.</p> - -<p>“Well, what in thunder will we do now?” asked the -Yankee, as he took a seat upon the ground.</p> - -<p>“Do?” replied the boy. “Why, go on through one of -the passages until we find our companions. Let’s make a -bee line through the one to our left.”</p> - -<p>“All right; I’m with you.”</p> - -<p>With Dick in the lead, they started swiftly along the -passage.</p> - -<p>Presently they heard the sounds of approaching footsteps.</p> - -<p>“Somebody coming ter look fer us, I’ll bet a dollar,” -remarked Haypole.</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t wonder. What shall we do—go on and -meet whoever it is, or wait till they come up?”</p> - -<p>“Let’s wait.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” and leaning against the rocky wall, Dick -listened to the sounds which were coming nearer every -second.</p> - -<p>They soon perceived a light, and the next minute saw -a number of the men of Hez approaching, carrying -torches.</p> - -<p>That our two friends were perceived at the same time -was plainly evident, for the strangely attired men uttered -exclamations of pleasure, and motioned the pair not to -be afraid.</p> - -<p>At the same time one of their number called out, in -good English:</p> - -<p>“Fear not, my friends. No harm shall befall you. We -have come in search of you, at the queen’s order. Your -friends and companions are safe and sound, and await -you.”</p> - -<p>“Who in thunder are you?” asked Haypole, stepping -forward.</p> - -<p>“I am an American, like yourself. But, come! There -is no time for parleying now. Follow us, and you will -be safe.”</p> - -<p>“Lead on!” exclaimed Dick Vincey. “I am glad the -queen wants us; I can have another look at her handsome -face.”</p> - -<p>Away went the men with Dick and Haypole in their -midst, through various passages and caves, until finally -they came in sight of the village of stone buildings.</p> - -<p>It did not take the two returned wanderers long to -observe Leo and the professor standing in front of one -of the houses, and they were now satisfied that no harm -would befall them.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p> - -<p>Leo and Prof. Easy rushed forward to meet them, and -while they were talking together the man in charge of -the searching party went to report to Queen Olive.</p> - -<p>“Where have you fellows been?” asked Leo, shaking -his cousin’s hand.</p> - -<p>“To the queerest and most beautiful spot mortal eyes -ever rested upon,” replied Dick.</p> - -<p>And then he proceeded to relate where he and the -Yankee had been, and what they had seen.</p> - -<p>“Wonderful!” exclaimed the professor; and then turning -to the man who spoke English in the crowd of Hezzians -who had brought the two lost ones back, he said:</p> - -<p>“Do you know anything of this pool and fountain, my -man?”</p> - -<p>“I do,” was the reply; “it is the identical fountain Ponce -de Leon was in search of so many years ago. If you -want to learn all about it, converse with Roderique de -Amilo, the one who discovered it. There he is over there -in front of his dwelling.”</p> - -<p>“Is that Roderique de Amilo?” asked Leo. “Why, he -is crazy, is he not?”</p> - -<p>“No; anything but crazy, as you will find when you -become better acquainted with him. He is the discoverer -of the magic fountain and the founder of this race.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” went on the man, seating himself upon a rock; -“I may as well tell you all about it now as any other time, -since you are all to be citizens of Hez in the future. It -is a queer story, and I have not said that I believe it.</p> - -<p>“To begin, my name is Andrew Jones; I am from Kentucky, -and have no relatives living save my wife, who -is a native of this place. I came here a little over a year -ago, and expect to stay here as long as I live.</p> - -<p>“Roderique de Amilo is the founder of this race, though -he seldom admits it. He discovered this underground -country in the year 1509, by being washed over the falls -into the river you passed on entering here.</p> - -<p>“While here he discovered the fountain you speak of, -and feeling satisfied that it was the one he was in search -of, he bathed in it, the result being that he attained perpetual -youth.</p> - -<p>“Then it dawned upon him that he should have a helpmate; -so one day he went to the edge of the pool and -prayed for a wife, and lo! before his prayer was finished -there arose from the crystal water the most beautiful -woman man had ever seen!</p> - -<p>“Well, to make a long story short, De Amilo took her -for his wife, and from them came these people, who number -about three hundred, outside of those who came here -after.</p> - -<p>“You have the legend just as everybody who comes here -gets it. You may draw your own conclusions from it, -as I have done.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I don’t believe it,” said Haypole, bluntly.</p> - -<p>Andrew Jones laughed.</p> - -<p>“Few do,” said he; “and none seem to care much.”</p> - -<p>“But how about the beautiful woman who came from -the pool in such a mysterious manner?” said Dick. -“Surely that was not Queen Olive?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, no!” replied Jones; “I forgot to tell you about her. -She visited the pool one day after she had lived here in -the neighborhood of a hundred years, and concluded to -bathe in its clear waters. The moment she entered it -she disappeared, and has never been heard of since.”</p> - -<p>“That yarn would make a first-class fairy story for -little children,” said Leo, laughing. “But, anyhow, I -shan’t dispute it. Ah! here comes the queen’s messenger -after Dick and Martin, I suppose. Go on, fellows, and -take the iron-clad oath of allegiance to Hez.”</p> - -<p>Sure enough, Dick and the Yankee were led to the -queen’s house, and while they were gone Leo and the rest -busied themselves in cleaning their weapons, which Roderique -de Amilo had so kindly returned to them.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_VIII_DICK_VINCEY_AND_THE_QUEEN">CHAPTER VIII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">DICK VINCEY AND THE QUEEN.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Queen Olive stood in the doorway of the handsomely -furnished stone building, called the palace, when Dick -and the Yankee were brought up.</p> - -<p>With a wave of her hand she ordered the Hezzians to -retire, and then motioned the two to follow her inside.</p> - -<p>Dick noticed that the beautiful queen eyed him with a -more than ordinary look, and he was not a little puzzled -over it.</p> - -<p>But he was destined to know what it meant ere long. -Martin Haypole had mentioned in a joke that the queen -of Hez had fallen in love with the good-looking Dick -Vincey, and this was indeed the case.</p> - -<p>The graceful creature led them to the table on which -rested the strip of parchment containing the signatures of -those who had signed the agreement to stay in the land -of Hez forever.</p> - -<p>Dick glanced over these, and saw the names of Leo and -the rest of his companions, and, consequently, he had little -hesitation in taking the oath.</p> - -<p>“Now, then,” observed Queen Olive, “you may retire -to the company of your friends; I would speak a few -words in private to this young man.”</p> - -<p>The Yankee at once took his departure, and the fair -ruler of Hez led Dick into a handsomely furnished apartment.</p> - -<p>She motioned him to a seat on a divan of dyed skins, -and then blew a tiny whistle attached to one of her -bracelets.</p> - -<p>Almost immediately a servant appeared and bowed to -the floor.</p> - -<p>The queen addressed her in Spanish for a moment, and -she retired, only to return five minutes later with a stone -tray containing a choice repast, the sight of which made -Dick’s mouth water.</p> - -<p>“You are hungry, I know—appease your appetite.”</p> - -<p>He did not wait for a second invitation, but at once -proceeded to eat, all the while wondering why it was -that he was treated in such a royal manner.</p> - -<p>When he had satisfied his appetite the queen again -blew her whistle, and the servant returned, bringing in -a decanter and a couple of drinking vessels.</p> - -<p>She then took the tray and retired.</p> - -<p>“Now, then,” said her majesty, as she poured some -amber-colored liquid from the decanter, “to begin with, I -want you to tell me your name.”</p> - -<p>This Dick promptly did, and then, following the example -of his fair hostess, placed the beverage she had -poured from the decanter to his lips.</p> - -<p>It had such a peculiar, exhilarating taste that he drained -the cup at a single gulp.</p> - -<p>Of all the wines he had ever drunk, that certainly was -the best.</p> - -<p>That it was intoxicating, he knew, for the moment he -had swallowed it a sort of dreamy feeling of the deepest<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> -content came over him, and he settled back upon the divan -and gazed into the face of the lovely creature before him -with a listless smile upon his countenance.</p> - -<p>“Do you think you will ever want to leave this land?” -asked Queen Olive, as she took a seat before him.</p> - -<p>“No,” returned Dick; “never—as long as you remain -here.”</p> - -<p>Instead of becoming offended at this speech, a look of -pleasure came over her face.</p> - -<p>“Why? Am I more beautiful than the ladies of your -own country?” she asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes—a thousand times yes!”</p> - -<p>“Do you like me?”</p> - -<p>This question staggered the boy, and he involuntarily -half arose to his feet.</p> - -<p>Did he like her! What a question for such a beautiful -creature to ask him! And she a queen, too!</p> - -<p>“Why, what do you mean?” he stammered, in reply.</p> - -<p>“I mean just this: I have selected you as the man to -be my future husband. It was decreed long ago that no -queen who ruled the land of Hez should ever marry, unless -her husband be a man who was not a native of the -place. Thus far such has happened regularly, there always -being a stranger to arrive here at about the right -time. But this time more than one came, and out of the -number I have chosen you.”</p> - -<p>“But,” interposed Dick, who had settled back upon -the divan again, and returned to his half-listless condition, -“why should you choose me—a complete stranger, -and entirely unknown to you?”</p> - -<p>“Because I love you!”</p> - -<p>“Well, you see, oh, queen, while you have long considered -the question of marriage, I have never given the -subject a thought until now. You must give me time to -study over the question.”</p> - -<p>“You may have as much time as you desire,” she said; -“that is, if you answer one question to my satisfaction.”</p> - -<p>“What is that question, oh, queen?”</p> - -<p>“Don’t address me by that title—call me Olive,” she -exclaimed, rising and laying her hand upon his shoulder. -“The question I would ask is, Do you love me?”</p> - -<p>For the space of a minute a deep silence reigned, and -then Dick Vincey spoke:</p> - -<p>“I do, Olive.”</p> - -<p>He stretched forth his arms as if to fold her to his -bosom, but she waved him back with a pleased laugh.</p> - -<p>“I am glad,” was all she said. And then she motioned -him to retire to the companionship of his friends.</p> - -<p>Much mystified, Dick obeyed.</p> - -<p>He was half angry at being turned aside just as he had -made his declaration of love; but then he did not know -that the queen was but putting him to the test to see if -he was sincere.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter, old fellow?” asked Leo, as Dick approached -the house that had been given to the swamp explorers. -“You look as though you were worried over -something.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I am all right,” was the reply; and then he took -the weapons belonging to him, strapping the belt about -his waist and thrusting the pair of revolvers and hunting -knife into it.</p> - -<p>“How did you make out with ther gal—queen?” said -Haypole, who stood in the doorway perfectly contented, -now that he had had a good meal, and was in the company -of Prof. Easy and the rest.</p> - -<p>“That reminds me,” exclaimed Dick, suddenly. “I left -something in the palace; I’ll go and get it, I guess.”</p> - -<p>Then, before he could be questioned any further, he -started back to the house of Queen Olive.</p> - -<p>Arriving there, he did not hesitate, but boldly walked in.</p> - -<p>The handsome queen was waiting for him, it seemed, -for she met him in the hallway, and conducted him again -to the room he had before been led into.</p> - -<p>“I knew you would come back,” said she, quietly.</p> - -<p>“Why?” he asked, in a petulant manner.</p> - -<p>“Because you really love me.”</p> - -<p>“I told you I did before you dismissed me a few moments -ago.”</p> - -<p>“Ah! but this proves it. And now, let me say, I shall -consider myself engaged to you. But our marriage cannot -take place under two years from the time of our -first meeting—that is one of the laws of this country.”</p> - -<p>“Laws be blowed!” exclaimed Dick. “If I was willing -to marry you now I might change my mind before -that time.”</p> - -<p>“But you will not, though. Two years hence we will be -man and wife, and you will be the happiest man in the -Land of Hez, and I will be the happiest woman!”</p> - -<p>Then there was a pause, after which Olive, as she desired -Dick to call her, poured out some more of the wine -and handed it to her lover.</p> - -<p>As soon as the boy had drunk it, the same feeling of -content, as on former occasions, came over him, and he -grew talkative.</p> - -<p>“Tell me about this wonderful country, Olive,” said he, -taking her by the hand.</p> - -<p>“That I will gladly do, Dick,” replied she, with equal -familiarity, and she proceeded to relate the same legend -as told by Andrew Jones a short time before.</p> - -<p>“Do you believe that story, Olive?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“I hardly know whether I do or not. It seems so -strange and unnatural. Yet Roderique de Amilo was as -he is now as long ago as the oldest of our people can remember.”</p> - -<p>“How is it that he does not rule the Land of Hez himself?”</p> - -<p>“Because, the legend states, that he agreed with his -beautiful wife that it should forever be ruled by woman. -It was for that reason that she plunged into the pool, -thinking it would prove a perpetual life to her.”</p> - -<p>“Has anybody else ever bathed in the pool?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes; a dozen or more. But not until a few -years ago; none of our people would ever believe the -story before.”</p> - -<p>“Then some do believe it now?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, a few, and there must be something wonderful -about the crystal waters of the fountain, for those who -have bathed in it have never visibly grown older.”</p> - -<p>“I think I shall have to take a bath in it some day -myself,” said Dick, with a smile.</p> - -<p>“And I, too,” replied Olive, thinking he meant it. “It -would be so nice, when we are married, to go on living -and never grow old, with no fear of dying, unless through -some accident. Could anyone ask for anything more than -that?”</p> - -<p>Dick was about to make a reply, when the report of -a rifle rang out close by.</p> - -<p>Hastily excusing himself, he dashed from the room -outside.</p> - -<p>He beheld the man known as Reginald Lacy fleeing -across the level country beneath the opening in the roof,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> -and after him, in hot pursuit, was Philander Owens, a -still smoking rifle in his hands.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_IX_THE_DEVILS_KINGDOM">CHAPTER IX.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">THE DEVIL’S KINGDOM.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Dick at once made his way to the side of Leo, who was -just coming from the house, followed by Haypole and -the professor.</p> - -<p>“Great Scott!” exclaimed Dick. “Owens seems to be -very savage against that ragged stranger. What shall we -do—help him catch him?”</p> - -<p>“No,” returned his cousin. “It is no affair of ours; -let them settle their own difficulty.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” nodded Prof. Easy. “We do not understand -their case, and should, therefore, let them alone.”</p> - -<p>“Ter tell ther truth, I don’t like either one of them -fellers,” observed the Yankee. “They be too blamed mysterious -for me.”</p> - -<p>But if our friends did not attempt to assist Philander -Owens in catching Reginald Lacy, the men of Hez were -not going to allow him to roam about their haunts without -first taking the oath of allegiance to the tribe.</p> - -<p>Roderique de Amilo quickly called a score of men together -and started in pursuit after Owens, who was doing -his best to overtake his enemy.</p> - -<p>All soon disappeared, and then our friends set about to -fix up their home to suit their tastes.</p> - -<p>They arose soon after daylight, and after they had -eaten a light breakfast, prepared to look around a bit.</p> - -<p>Then it struck Leo that it was about time he saw -something of Azurma, the girl who had conducted them -from the magic cave. From the strain in which she had -conversed to him, he thought she would again seek his -presence long before this.</p> - -<p>Prof. Easy was bent on seeing what kind of place Hez -was, and, at his request, a party was formed to make a -tour of the place.</p> - -<p>The party was formed of but seven—Leo, Dick, Prof. -Easy, Martin Haypole, Lucky, the darky, and the American -known as Andrew Jones, and Roderique de Amilo.</p> - -<p>They set out in the direction taken by Reginald Lacy -and his persistent pursuer.</p> - -<p>“A wonderful land is this,” remarked De Amilo, as -they walked along. “I have never fully explored it myself -in all the years I have lived here. Nearly everything -you will meet and see that interests you will be found to -be mysterious. In fact, this whole country is a land of -mystery.”</p> - -<p>“It was a dod-rotted mystery how we ever come ter -git in here, anyhow,” said the Yankee.</p> - -<p>“That reminds me,” put in Andrew Jones, suddenly. -“How did you get the door in the obelisk open, anyway?”</p> - -<p>The professor quickly explained how they had found -the stone cube, and the use they had put it to.</p> - -<p>“By Jove!” exclaimed Jones. “The very identical way -that I got in myself. How can it be that the cube was -missing from the hole in which it fitted, and found so -many yards from the obelisk?”</p> - -<p>“That’s where the mystery comes in,” said Leo.</p> - -<p>“Yes, that’s so. I forgot what kind of place I was in. -Talking to my own countrymen made me think I was back -in civilization again.”</p> - -<p>They had by this time entered one of the many passages, -and torches were put in use.</p> - -<p>At the suggestion of Dick, Roderique de Amilo led -them to the fountain and pool, and Leo and the professor -were surprised beyond measure at what they saw.</p> - -<p>The Spaniard pointed to what was inscribed upon the -stone tablet, and said:</p> - -<p>“I did that; and I am the living proof that what it -means is true.”</p> - -<p>Then he again went over the legend of Hez, and wound -up by pointing to the identical spot in the pool where the -beautiful woman, whom he afterward made his wife, -arose so mysteriously.</p> - -<p>De Amilo told his story in such a solemn way that his -hearers were more or less impressed with it.</p> - -<p>“I believe that in some manner that man has become -satisfied that yarn is true himself,” said Leo, in a whisper -to his cousin.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” assented Dick; “either that or else the legend is -true, after all.”</p> - -<p>Leo smiled.</p> - -<p>“Why, you don’t believe it, do you, old fellow? Has -the beautiful queen told you the same thing?”</p> - -<p>“She did tell me the same story, and I am not prepared -to say whether I believe it or not.”</p> - -<p>At this juncture their conductors signified that they -were going to leave the pool in the strangely lighted -cavern, and the conversation ended for the time.</p> - -<p>“We will now show you the devil’s kingdom, which is -one of the most wonderful sights to be seen in this land,” -observed Jones, as they entered the passage again.</p> - -<p>It was here that De Amilo came to a halt. Turning to -those who were following him, he said:</p> - -<p>“Is there anybody among you who desires to live forever? -If so, bathe in the pool beneath the spray of the -fountain.”</p> - -<p>But all hands, even to Jones, shook their heads, and -they went on their way, the Spaniard leading them in -silence.</p> - -<p>When they arrived at the point where the four passages -met, they again came to a halt.</p> - -<p>A moment later they started through the mouth of one -of these, and presently found themselves going down a -sort of winding stairs.</p> - -<p>Down, down they went for many feet, and then they -came to a vast, shell-like cavern of what appeared to be -almost unlimited size.</p> - -<p>It was illumined by a strange, flickering, red light, and -a purple mist pervaded the atmosphere.</p> - -<p>Full of curiosity, our friends followed their conductors -until they came to a broad roadway, that certainly looked -as though it had been built with human hands.</p> - -<p>Along this, for perhaps a quarter of a mile, they went, -and then they saw that it suddenly shot downward at an -angle of forty-five degrees.</p> - -<p>As they rounded a cleft of rock, Andrew Jones came -to a halt, and, pointing downward, exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Look there! Did you ever see anything to beat that?”</p> - -<p>The swamp explorers followed the direction his finger -pointed, and beheld a truly marvelous sight.</p> - -<p>Beneath them was a rift of many feet in length, and in -the sides, at irregular intervals, were small apertures resembling -the portholes of a war ship, through which, -ever and anon, came puffs of flame and smoke.</p> - -<p>To look at the scene in a certain way, one could almost -imagine that a pair of immense ironclads were engaged in -battle.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p> - -<p>But no noise, beyond a fizzing sound, could be heard -when the puffs came.</p> - -<p>Through the center of the rift, or ravine, as it might -properly be called, a stream of water flowed, and this -glittered and flashed in all the colors of the rainbow as the -lurid streaks of flame belched over it.</p> - -<p>On either side the walls sloped down in the form of a -very steep hill, passing directly over the portholes from -which the puffs of flame came.</p> - -<p>“So that’s what you call the Devil’s Kingdom, is it?” -remarked the professor, addressing Jones.</p> - -<p>“Yes; that is the name Señor de Amilo gave it,” was -the reply.</p> - -<p>“Well, I’ll be ding-wizzened, if it ain’t a good name -for it!” exclaimed Haypole, shrugging his shoulders. -“Now, if ther old boy was ter come out of one of them -streams of fire, an’ walk up an’ down ther middle of that -stream, with a pitchfork over his shoulder, ther scene -would be complete.”</p> - -<p>“Great Scott!” cried Dick and Leo in a breath; “there -he is, now!”</p> - -<p>Ejaculations of surprise went up from all hands, as -with distended eyes they saw a log go shooting down the -stream with a figure clinging to it.</p> - -<p>“That’s Philander Owens, or I’m a sinner!” exclaimed -the Yankee.</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” said Leo, taking a step forward to get a -better view of the startling scene.</p> - -<p>As he did so he stepped upon a small stone, which, rolling -under his foot, caused him to slip and lose his balance.</p> - -<p>The next instant he went shooting down the smooth -decline with the velocity of the wind!</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_X_IN_THE_BOWELS_OF_THE_EARTH">CHAPTER X.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">IN THE BOWELS OF THE EARTH.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>When Leo Malvern felt himself sliding down the slippery -wall of rock he closed his eyes and uttered a silent -prayer, thinking that all was up with him.</p> - -<p>In vain he strove to seize upon something to stay his -progress; there was naught but the smooth surface, and -his speed kept on increasing.</p> - -<p>Luckily he was sliding feet foremost, and had it not -been for the fact that death stared him in the face, he -would almost have imagined that he was coasting down -an icy hill without a sled.</p> - -<p>He had a recollection of hearing a cry of horror escape -the lips of his friends, and then nothing save the roaring -sound of the belching flames below him reached his ears.</p> - -<p>Leo was but a few seconds in making the descent, and -yet it seemed to be as many hours to him.</p> - -<p>Just as he slid over the edge of the decline there came a -puff of smoke and flame which completely enveloped his -form and screened him from the view of his companions -above. Blinded and scorching from the heat, he fell, -with a splash, into the cooling waters of the rushing -stream.</p> - -<p>When he found that he was not dead, nor yet materially -injured, he made a mighty effort and struggled to the -surface.</p> - -<p>He found he could keep his head above the water with -little or no difficulty, and with a feeling of relief he endeavored -to look ahead and see whither he was being -carried by the rushing stream.</p> - -<p>Puff! puff! The terrible cross fire of flame and smoke -kept shooting over him a few feet above his head, making -it one of the most fearful experiences he had ever undergone.</p> - -<p>“My God!” thought the boy, “will I ever get out of -this alive?”</p> - -<p>But on swept the rushing current, and on went Leo, -while the fire and flame roared over his head, ever and -anon scorching his defenseless face.</p> - -<p>But suddenly the flashes of fire ceased as if by magic, -and all was in darkness.</p> - -<p>The stream flowed through a tunnel, and it was this -that the boy had reached.</p> - -<p>Whizz! whirr! Away he sped, expecting every moment -to strike upon a sharp rock and be dashed to pieces.</p> - -<p>But no such thing occurred. Scarcely more than a -minute had elapsed before he again suddenly whirled into -the light.</p> - -<p>Leo was now nearly exhausted from his frantic efforts -to reach the shore, and it was fast telling upon him -now.</p> - -<p>The continual splashing of the water upon his face -made it difficult for him to breathe, and he felt soon that -he must give up.</p> - -<p>But he made one more mighty effort and half arose -in the water to see what sort of a place he had entered.</p> - -<p>He noticed that the stream had widened considerably, -and that there were no more signs of any fire.</p> - -<p>A few seconds later he heard a dull, roaring sound, -which caused him to turn a shade paler.</p> - -<p>A rapids was close at hand!</p> - -<p>Of this Leo felt certain. He had often before heard -the noise made by the falling of a large body of water.</p> - -<p>Although the stream was quite wide at this point it -was running like a mill race.</p> - -<p>Nearer and nearer the sound of the roaring waters came -to the helpless boy, and his last hopes sunk.</p> - -<p>What chance of life had he in being washed over a -falls, at the bottom of which, in all probability, was an -endless amount of sharp, jagged rocks, as is invariably -the case?</p> - -<p>Folding his arms, Leo threw himself upon his back, and -allowed himself to float along at the mercy of the powerful -current.</p> - -<p>The roaring sound now became deafening, and he felt -that the end was near.</p> - -<p>But stay! The sharp bark of a dog is heard, and there -is a splash close at hand.</p> - -<p>Half a minute later a pair of jaws close upon the -collar of Leo’s coat, and he comes to a standstill with a -sudden jerk.</p> - -<p>What had happened now? was the thought that entered -his brain as he opened his eyes.</p> - -<p>A dog had him gripped firmly by the collar, and both -were being towed slowly toward the left bank of the -stream.</p> - -<p>As soon as Leo became aware of this he threw himself -over, and caught hold of the rope, which was secured -about the intelligent animal’s neck, thus lessening the -strain upon him.</p> - -<p>A cry of satisfaction went up from some one on the -shore as this action was perceived, and both boy and dog -were towed faster through the rushing water.</p> - -<p>Two minutes more, and Leo felt his feet strike the -bottom.</p> - -<p>It was then but the work of a moment for his preserver -to pull him ashore.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_16">[16]</a></span></p> - -<p>Leo was so exhausted that he fell to the ground in a -semi-unconscious state.</p> - -<p>It was several minutes before he recovered himself, and -when he did so his first thought was to see who it was -that had thus saved him in the nick of time.</p> - -<p>A man stood before him, patting a huge mastiff on -the head, and the young fellow could but give a start -of surprise when he saw that it was Reginald Lacy, the -man whose life was sought by Philander Owens.</p> - -<p>“So you have recovered, young fellow?” said Lacy, as -he coiled the rope which had been attached to the dog’s -neck.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” returned Leo, rising to his feet, “and I thank -you a thousand times for saving my life!”</p> - -<p>“Don’t mention it. I could not stand by and see a -man whom I had nothing against go over the falls, and -be dashed to pieces on the rocks below. Had you been -my enemy, I would not have raised a hand to help you.”</p> - -<p>Then the thought struck the young swamp explorer -that Philander Owens, clinging to a log, had preceded him -down the turbulent stream but a minute before. Had -Reginald Lacy stood upon the shore and watched him go -whirling to his death?</p> - -<p>As he looked at the man and saw the satisfied expression -that gleamed from his eyes, he made up his mind -that such indeed was the case.</p> - -<p>“That is a splendid dog you have,” remarked Leo. -“Had it not been for him all would have been up with -me.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” assented Lacy. “There are few better dogs -than Jupiter. He is the best friend I have got in the -whole world.”</p> - -<p>As he spoke a far-away look came into his eyes, and his -lips twitched nervously.</p> - -<p>“How did you get away down here, anyhow?” asked -Leo.</p> - -<p>“Through a network of passages. I was pursued, as -you know, by a man who desired to take my life; but he -will never do it now.”</p> - -<p>“Why, is he dead?”</p> - -<p>Lacy gave a start.</p> - -<p>“Who said he was dead?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Oh! no one. I only thought as much. I saw him -go rushing down the stream a few minutes ago. That -was the cause of my falling into it.”</p> - -<p>“Well, if he is dead I didn’t kill him,” was the vague -reply.</p> - -<p>“Let us find our way back to the village,” suggested -Leo.</p> - -<p>“Do you think I will not be harmed if I go there?”</p> - -<p>“I am sure you will not.”</p> - -<p>“All right; I’ll go, that is, if I can find the way.”</p> - -<p>“Why, don’t you think you can lead the way back over -the same route you came?”</p> - -<p>An anxious expression came over the boy’s face as he -asked the question.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know for sure. I came in such a hurry, being -pursued by a human sleuthhound as I was. But I ought -to be able to find the way without much trouble. Anyhow, -we will try. If I can’t, probably Jupiter can. Come—we -may as well start at once.”</p> - -<p>But here an unforeseen obstacle presented itself.</p> - -<p>The opening of this passage, which ran upward in a -steep ascent, was very small—not over four feet in -diameter.</p> - -<p>They had not gone into this more than a dozen feet -before they came to a halt, and saw that they could go -no further.</p> - -<p>A monster bowlder of iron stone had slipped or been -pushed into the passage from above, and it would have -taken at least a score of men to remove it.</p> - -<p>“Some of my hated enemy’s work,” said Lacy, as he -played with his beard nervously. “This is as far as he -followed me. He must have pushed this bowlder from -above and then went back and fallen into the stream. -Well, we must find some other way of getting out, or else -we can stay here in this wonderful underground place -and starve!”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XI_AZURMAS_SEARCH">CHAPTER XI.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">AZURMA’S SEARCH.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Dick Vincey gave an agonizing cry as he saw his -cousin disappear in the flame and smoke below them.</p> - -<p>“He’s lost—he’s lost!” he almost wailed. “What will -his parents say when I return without him?”</p> - -<p>“It’s too bad,” said Martin Haypole, consolingly, “but -I wouldn’t take on so much, if I was you. You know -none of us won’t ever git back ter home, anyway—we -have took our oaths that we won’t never leave this dod-rotted -country.”</p> - -<p>“Come,” remarked the professor, “let us get away from -this place. Leo is dead long before this—no earthly -power could save him.”</p> - -<p>“You are right,” assented Andrew Jones. “I am sorry, -but it can’t be helped.”</p> - -<p>“There is a possibility of his having passed through -the flame and smoke alive,” said De Amilo, the Spaniard; -“but the rushing stream—if he is not drowned in -that, he will be carried over a falls a few hunderd yards -further down, and be dashed to pieces on the rocks.”</p> - -<p>No one in the party had the least doubt but that Leo -Malvern was dead, and with a feeling of sorrow they -turned from the spot and started for the village.</p> - -<p>“May de good Lor’ save him!” whined Lucky, the -darky, wringing his hands. “Massa Leo was de bestest -friend dis poor darky eber had, an’ now him done gone -an’ got killed. Oh, why did us eber come to de Eberglades, -anyhow?”</p> - -<p>“It is my fault,” said Prof. Easy; “I had no business to -induce him to accompany me on my exploring tour. We -have made many discoveries, but this fearful accident -spoils all the pleasure there is in it.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t blame you, professor,” returned Dick. “It was -our own free wills that brought both Leo and myself to -the Land of Hez. Say no more about it, please.”</p> - -<p>As soon as the village was reached, Dick at once apprised -Queen Olive of what had happened.</p> - -<p>She sympathized with him, and tried to comfort him, -at the same time saying:</p> - -<p>“There is a possibility that your cousin is not dead. If -that is the case, there is but one who could seek him out -in the earth’s bowels and find him.”</p> - -<p>“Who is that one?” asked Dick, his hopes arising.</p> - -<p>“Azurma,” was the reply. “She has claimed him for -her husband, and if sent to look for him, she would never -come back without him.”</p> - -<p>“Send her, then.”</p> - -<p>“There will be no need of me sending her. When she -hears what has happened she will start at once on her own -hook. She has been unable to see Leo since she left him -in the dark cavern, the reason being that I ordered her<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_17">[17]</a></span> -not to do so, in punishment for leading you and your companions -from the magic chamber.”</p> - -<p>The queen blew a tiny whistle, and a servant appeared.</p> - -<p>“Send Azurma here,” said she, in Spanish.</p> - -<p>The servant bowed and retired, and a few minutes later -the beautiful Hez girl appeared.</p> - -<p>“What is it, O queen?” she asked. “Can I now be permitted -to see my future lord and master?”</p> - -<p>“You can; but you must first seek him out. He is lost, -having fallen into the stream that flows through the -Devil’s Kingdom. You are at liberty to go where you -please in the Land of Hez.”</p> - -<p>An expression of gratefulness, intermingled with fear, -came over the girl’s face, and then, without noticing Dick -in the least, she bowed and retired.</p> - -<p>The brave girl plodded on her way until she came to -the point where the four passages met, and here she -came to a pause.</p> - -<p>“He went down the stream that flows through the -Devil’s Kingdom,” she murmured, “and so must I, if I -would find him. If he perished, then so shall I! I have -said it, and my word shall not be broken!”</p> - -<p>Then with an expression of determination upon her -face, she started down the passage.</p> - -<p>She only stopped for a moment to view the scene that -had seemed such a wonder to our friends, and then started -off at right angles, with an idea of picking her way to -the shores of the stream below, beyond the smoke and -fire.</p> - -<p>That Azurma knew what she was doing was plainly -evident, for after a tedious descent of probably a mile, -she came to the point she desired to reach.</p> - -<p>The roaring of the flames was behind her, and the -swiftly rushing tide was within a few feet of her on the -right.</p> - -<p>Eagerly she scanned the shores on either side of the -subterranean stream for a sign of Leo Malvern.</p> - -<p>But not the least trace of him could she see.</p> - -<p>But Azurma had not given up all hope yet.</p> - -<p>With a resolute air she started along the shore in the -direction the water flowed.</p> - -<p>She now could hear the roaring of the water as it -dashed over the falls, and her face paled.</p> - -<p>Had the one she loved been swept over this?</p> - -<p>The thought was a sickening one to her, and for a -moment she tottered and almost fell to the ground.</p> - -<p>Just then the girl caught sight of a number of footprints -in the sand.</p> - -<p>In a moment she was kneeling upon the ground examining -them.</p> - -<p>As soon as she saw that they were not made by her own -people, a cry of joy escaped her lips.</p> - -<p>As the reader has already surmised, they were the -footprints of Leo Malvern and Reginald Lacy.</p> - -<p>Full of hope now, that her mission would prove successful, -Azurma followed the tracks.</p> - -<p>She reached the mouth of the passage and was just -about to enter it when a warning hiss told her that there -was danger ahead.</p> - -<p>The girl drew back with a half-smothered cry of alarm.</p> - -<p>“The picuasus!” she cried, in her own tongue. “Oh! -what shall I do now?”</p> - -<p>She hastily withdrew from the mouth of the passage -and looked about for a safe place of retreat.</p> - -<p>As she did so an immense turtle appeared through the -opening, and thrusting a horrible-looking head from its -shell, peered around to find the one who had disturbed it.</p> - -<p>The moment the creature’s beadlike eyes rested upon -Azurma a transformation took place.</p> - -<p>From the appearance of a huge turtle, it suddenly -changed to a spider of the most gigantic proportions.</p> - -<p>Long legs stretched out in every direction, and it began -walking toward the poor girl, with its body at least -two feet from the ground.</p> - -<p>Azurma stood as though petrified, her face the color -of ashes.</p> - -<p>With rapid strides the many-legged creature neared -her.</p> - -<p>When it had approached to within ten feet of her she -seemed to regain her senses.</p> - -<p>Uttering a wild shriek, she started to flee from the -spot with all her might.</p> - -<p>An ominous hiss came from the picuasus, as Azurma -called it, and the horrible thing increased its speed.</p> - -<p>Straight for the river the girl ran, and it was evident -that rather than be torn to pieces by the underground -denizen she would throw herself into the rushing water.</p> - -<p>When within ten yards of the water’s edge Azurma -stumbled and fell, and the next instant the picuasus -stretched forth its long tentacles to seize her.</p> - -<p>But they did not reach. At that moment the report of -a rifle rang out, and it tumbled to the ground in a heap.</p> - -<p>Azurma was saved!</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XII_AZURMA_FINDS_LEO">CHAPTER XII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">AZURMA FINDS LEO.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Reginald Lacy sank to the ground in a dejected manner -when he found that the mouth of the passage was -blocked.</p> - -<p>“We can’t get out,” he said, hoarsely. “We may as -well make up our minds that we have got to starve to -death!”</p> - -<p>“Brace up!” exclaimed Leo. “Never give up until -you are sure that you are lost. It was only a short time -ago that I was certain that I was rushing to my death. -But I was saved, and that has taught me a lesson. I -will not give up now until I feel the last breath leaving -my body.”</p> - -<p>The boy’s words seemed to imbue the man with a new -hope.</p> - -<p>He struggled to his feet again and patted his faithful -dog on the head.</p> - -<p>“If I only had something to eat,” he said, “there might -be a chance. I am very hungry, and so is Jupiter.”</p> - -<p>“Let us find something to eat.”</p> - -<p>“Where?”</p> - -<p>“Around here, somewhere. There might be living -creatures about; we have not searched, you know.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so; I never gave it a thought before. Lead -on and take my rifle; maybe you will be able to shoot -something.”</p> - -<p>Leo took the weapon and saw that it was loaded with -but four cartridges.</p> - -<p>That was the only firearm between the two, Leo having -lost his when he tumbled down the rocky decline in -the Devil’s Kingdom.</p> - -<p>“We have only got four shots to depend on,” said the -boy, motioning Lacy to follow him; “but if I have occasion -to use them I’ll make every one tell.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_18">[18]</a></span></p> - -<p>His companion nodded, and the two started back toward -the place they had come from.</p> - -<p>In a few minutes they reached the shore and began -looking about them for some signs of a creature that -might do to eat.</p> - -<p>A couple of hundred yards to the right was a group of -rocks, which looked as though it might possibly contain -the lair of a wild beast of some sort.</p> - -<p>Toward this Leo directed his steps, Lacy following.</p> - -<p>They searched about the place for over half an hour, -but not a living thing could they come across.</p> - -<p>Again they sat down, Lacy being very dejected.</p> - -<p>The dog, who had been nosing about considerably, suddenly -started off at a quick bound, at the same time uttering -a short bark.</p> - -<p>“He has struck the trail of something!” exclaimed -Reginald Lacy, springing to his feet as quickly as his -feeble condition would allow him.</p> - -<p>“Let us follow him,” says Leo.</p> - -<p>Away they went after Jupiter, in the hopes that he was -about to start up some game.</p> - -<p>They had no sooner entered a small passage between -two clefts of rock than they were startled by hearing a -wild scream.</p> - -<p>“Great God!” exclaimed Lacy. “What is that?”</p> - -<p>“It sounds to me like the cry of a female in distress,” -replied his young companion, turning about and starting -hurriedly in the direction the scream came from.</p> - -<p>In a few seconds Leo came in sight of Azurma, with -the horrible picuasus pursuing her.</p> - -<p>Again a wild scream left the girl’s lips, and though the -distance was rather great, the boy instantly concluded to -risk a shot.</p> - -<p>He knew full well if he missed the girl was lost, and -that nerved him to do his best.</p> - -<p>He placed his rifle to his shoulder, and, taking a quick -aim, pulled the trigger.</p> - -<p>Crack!</p> - -<p>As the report rung out the picuasus fell, the bullet having -pierced one of its eyes.</p> - -<p>As brave as she was, Azurma had swooned, and as -soon as he reached the spot, Leo set about to bring her to.</p> - -<p>He soon accomplished this, and by the time Reginald -Lacy reached the spot she was sitting up clasping her -preserver by the hands and gazing into his eyes in a -mute expression of joy.</p> - -<p>“I have found you, O my future lord and master!” she -said, and then she did not speak again for fully a minute.</p> - -<p>Reginald Lacy stood staring at her like one in a dream. -At length he spoke.</p> - -<p>“How did you get here, miss?” he asked. “Can you -lead us to a place where we can get something to eat?”</p> - -<p>“Are you hungry?” said Azurma, rising to her feet and -unslinging the bag from her shoulder. “If you are, eat.”</p> - -<p>Lacy needed no second invitation.</p> - -<p>He seized the food with a cry of joy and began devouring -it ravenously.</p> - -<p>“God bless you, my girl!” he exclaimed, hoarsely; “you -have saved my life. But my dog must have something, -too. I will call him, and share with him.”</p> - -<p>He gave a long whistle, and in a few moments Jupiter -came rushing from a pile of rocks with the speed of an -antelope.</p> - -<p>The scent he had taken had proved but a myth, after all, -and the dog, like his master, being very hungry, soon -forgot all about it.</p> - -<p>He scarcely noticed the dead picuasus, but at once -eagerly swallowed the food Lacy gave him.</p> - -<p>“Now, Azurma,” said Leo, “can you take us back to -the village?”</p> - -<p>“I can, and will at once, O my——”</p> - -<p>“Hold on,” interrupted the boy. “Call me Leo; don’t -use any more high-fangled titles—I don’t like it.”</p> - -<p>“Be it as you say, then, Leo. Whenever you are ready, -I will conduct you safely to your friends and mine.”</p> - -<p>Then, acting on Azurma’s advice, he seized her by -the hand and started with all speed for the stream, Lacy -and the dog following close behind.</p> - -<p>Once there, Leo turned to look for Reginald Lacy and -the dog.</p> - -<p>A startling scene met his gaze.</p> - -<p>Lacy had ventured too far out and the current had -carried him off his feet.</p> - -<p>Jupiter had seized him by the collar and was endeavoring -to swim ashore with him.</p> - -<p>“Help!” exclaimed Lacy, doing his best to stem the tide.</p> - -<p>“Let the dog swim ashore with the rope—that is your -only hope!” exclaimed the boy, rushing into the water as -far as he dared.</p> - -<p>But this Jupiter could not be made to do. He was bent -on saving the life of his master, but he was going to do it -in his own way.</p> - -<p>Further and further the man and dog were sucked from -the shore, in spite of the superhuman efforts they made.</p> - -<p>Leo was completely dismayed. The very ones who -had saved his life were now going to their own death -over the falls.</p> - -<p>He had no rope to throw to them, and could but stand -upon the bank and witness it.</p> - -<p>Faster and faster the struggling man and dog were carried, -and nearer and nearer they were whirled to the falls.</p> - -<p>Azurma had turned her back upon the scene, but a -strange fascination seemed to hold Leo’s eyes upon the -doomed man and his faithful dog.</p> - -<p>The next moment they went whirling over the cataract -with a mighty rush.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XIII_BALLOTING_FOR_HUSBANDS">CHAPTER XIII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">BALLOTING FOR HUSBANDS.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Completely unnerved at the sight, Leo turned from the -spot.</p> - -<p>“Come, Azurma,” said he, “we will go back to the -village.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, Leo,” was the reply; “nothing could save the -man and dog from death. Their lifeless bodies are floating -in the pool at the foot of the falls by this time.”</p> - -<p>For fear that another picuasus might show up, they -hurriedly left the spot.</p> - -<p>Azurma led the way back over the same route by which -they had come, and in due time they arrived at the village, -without further accidents.</p> - -<p>The girl clasped Leo lovingly by the arm when they -neared the palace, and Dick and Martin Haypole, who saw -them coming, flung their caps in the air and uttered a -cheer that brought out almost every soul in the village.</p> - -<p>“Well, I’ll be everlasting ding-wizzened if ther boy isn’t -alive an’ well as any of us! An’ ter think that he passed -through both fire an’ water without gettin’ a scratch! -’Tain’t fer him to die in this country—that’s certain.”</p> - -<p>And Dick! The boy could hardly express his joy at -finding his cousin alive.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_19">[19]</a></span></p> - -<p>Queen Olive, who could not help hearing the commotion, -came outside and nodded when she saw what caused -it, as though she was well satisfied with Azurma’s success.</p> - -<p>“I knew that if he was alive she would find him,” said -she to Dick.</p> - -<p>“All that I can say is that I am glad of it,” was the -reply.</p> - -<p>“Azurma is a very brave girl,” said Leo. “Had it not -been for her I would never have found my way to this -place again. I don’t know how I shall ever repay her.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, that is easy,” returned Azurma; “promise to become -my lord and master when the proper time arrives.”</p> - -<p>The queen then spoke, informing Leo what the custom -of Hez was, concluding with:</p> - -<p>“I have just been visited by a committee of unmarried -ladies, who demand that they shall have an opportunity -of drawing lots for each of you. It is the custom, and -we must adhere to it. I have appointed to-morrow morning -for the drawing to take place. You will all remember -this, and be at the palace an hour after sunrise.”</p> - -<p>With these words she left our friends, taking Azurma -with her.</p> - -<p>The next morning, at the appointed time, Leo, Dick, -Prof. Easy, Martin Haypole and Lucky made their way -to the abode of the queen.</p> - -<p>At least half a hundred girls and middle-aged women -were there, and it was with great difficulty that our -friends managed to squeeze their way in.</p> - -<p>More than one pair of eyes cast a bewitching glance at -them as they passed, and Lucky and the Yankee grinned -in a wholesale manner.</p> - -<p>Queen Olive was at the further end of the long hall -through the center of the building, and Dick noticed that -her face wore an anxious look.</p> - -<p>When all had assembled and the utmost quiet reigned, -she arose and addressed the audience in Spanish.</p> - -<p>“Women of Hez,” said she, “we have assembled here -this morning, according to our ancient custom, to choose -five husbands. Our law is that no woman shall ever -marry, unless her husband be a stranger from the outside -world. That is the way our race was founded, and is the -reason why we are so few in number. But the custom -must be kept up. There are fifty-one of us here, and -there are but five strangers. Forty-six must be disappointed. -As Queen of Hez, I shall choose one of the five -without going into the form of drawing lots.”</p> - -<p>A slight murmur of disapproval arose from the assemblage -as these words rang out.</p> - -<p>Queen Olive evidently expected this, for, with flashing -eyes, she exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Silence! I am the ruler of this land, and my word is -law.”</p> - -<p>Then motioning to Dick to step forward, she went on:</p> - -<p>“This is the man I have chosen for my husband; he -loves me and I love him.”</p> - -<p>Nothing abashed, Dick took his place beside the beautiful -creature.</p> - -<p>But that the girls were anything but satisfied was -plainly apparent. They thought that in a case of this -kind the queen should place herself upon an equal footing -with them, and take her chances.</p> - -<p>But Queen Olive thought differently, and that settled -it, for the time being, anyhow.</p> - -<p>As soon as her majesty ceased speaking, Azurma -pushed her way through the crowd and made an eloquent -address, relating how she had saved Leo from a death -of starvation, winding up with a strong argument that -he should be given to her.</p> - -<p>But the Hez beauties would not listen to this, and so -Azurma’s appeal was ruled down.</p> - -<p>At Queen Olive’s order, a small, square box was brought -forth, which contained a number of small pieces of coal-like -substance, and one small bit of crystal of the same -size and weight.</p> - -<p>Then every female present was securely blindfolded -and directed to step forward, one at a time, and pick out -one of the pieces.</p> - -<p>The one who was fortunate enough to get hold of the -bit of crystal was the one to have the husband.</p> - -<p>In case that no one got hold of the crystal, the queen -had the power to give him to whoever she saw fit.</p> - -<p>Leo fervently desired that this might be the case, for -he felt that if he was compelled to become engaged to -any of the females present he would rather it would be -Azurma, for the simple reason that she wanted him, and -he owed her a debt of gratitude for coming to hunt him -up.</p> - -<p>When everything was in readiness, the women stepped -forward to draw the pieces from the box.</p> - -<p>It was quite interesting, and our friends watched the -result with bated breath.</p> - -<p>As fast as one selected, the bandage was removed from -her eyes and she retired to the other end of the hall.</p> - -<p>Azurma was the fifth one to draw, and when a black -ballot was disclosed to her view, she uttered a cry of dismay, -and staggered blindly from the spot.</p> - -<p>The next to step forward was a girl as young and fully -as beautiful as she.</p> - -<p>As she lifted the ballot from the box a murmur went -up from the assemblage.</p> - -<p>She held the piece of crystal in her hand!</p> - -<p>With an expression of triumph upon her beautiful face, -she held out her arms and approached Leo.</p> - -<p>But she never reached him. A figure bounded forward -with the swiftness of an enraged panther; a blade flashed -in the air, and the would-be bride fell to the stone floor, -the blood spurting from a wound in her left side.</p> - -<p>It was Azurma who had committed the deed, and with -flashing eyes and heaving breast she drew herself to her -full height.</p> - -<p>“Thus I have broken the laws of Hez!” she exclaimed, -in a dramatic tone. “Do with me what you will, O -queen!”</p> - -<p>It had all happened so quickly that our friends were -utterly astounded, and before they could fully comprehend -what had taken place, Azurma was seized and bound, -and conducted from the building.</p> - -<p>And the girl who had proven so unfortunate in picking -out the crystal—she never spoke again. The blade had -severed her heart in twain, and the beautiful Azurma was -a murderess!</p> - -<p>Leo turned sick at heart when he realized that he was -the cause of the tragedy, and he leaned against the wall -in a dazed condition.</p> - -<p>“Remove the body!”</p> - -<p>It was Queen Olive who spoke.</p> - -<p>Her command was instantly obeyed, and then, as though -nothing had happened, the ballots were shaken about in -the box, and it was announced that it would be decided -who should have Martin Haypole.</p> - -<p>“Gosh!” exclaimed the Yankee; “I hope no one don’t<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> -git killed on my account! I’ll be satisfied with any of ther -younger gals!”</p> - -<p>This time nearly everyone had a chance at the box before -the crystal was drawn, and then it resulted in favor -of a buxom Hez maiden of fair appearance and uncertain -age.</p> - -<p>“Well, I rather guess you’ll do,” observed Haypole, as -he shook hands with her, “though I’ll be ding-wizzened -if I don’t wish it had been one of ther younger ones. -Howsumever, beggars mustn’t be choosers, an’, though -I ain’t exactly been a-beggin’ for a wife, I’ll take yer when -ther times comes, an’ try an’ be satisfied.”</p> - -<p>The next victim was the professor, and, with his face -wreathed in smiles, he waited the result.</p> - -<p>Almost the first one to draw was the fortunate one, and -she being one of the beauties of the country, the professor -nearly swallowed his false teeth, so broad was his smile -of satisfaction.</p> - -<p>“Golly!” said Lucky, when he was ordered to step forth -for inspection; “I declar’ ter goodness, if dey ain’t treatin’ -dis chile well in dis yer country! Furst dey make him -all white, wif de excepshun of his face, which am a yaller -color, an den dey present him wif a wife! Well, I’s’ll be -satisfied wif any ob dem.”</p> - -<p>In a few minutes it was all settled, and the winner of the -prize, who was old enough to be the darky’s mother, -seemed to be perfectly satisfied.</p> - -<p>“Now,” said the queen, “all who have been chosen as -husbands will leave, except the one who lost his bride -at the hand of Azurma. Another ballot must be taken for -him.”</p> - -<p>Even Dick was forced to retire with the others, and -that left Leo the only male in the crowd.</p> - -<p>The more the young fellow thought over what had just -occurred the stronger became his determination that he -would allow the farce, as he considered it, to go no further.</p> - -<p>The part he had already played had been quite enough -for him, and he made up his mind that if Azurma could -not have him, no one else should.</p> - -<p>Just as the queen was getting the box ready, he stepped -forward and exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Stop! I have had enough of this. I will allow no -further drawing for me, as I have made up my mind not -to marry at all!”</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XIV_AZURMA_SUFFERS_THE_PENALTY_OF_HER_CRIME">CHAPTER XIV.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">AZURMA SUFFERS THE PENALTY OF HER CRIME.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>The next morning the swamp explorers were up bright -and early.</p> - -<p>They had been invited to be present at the execution -of the murderess, Azurma, and though none of them were -bloodthirsty enough to long for such sights, the novelty -of the thing caused them to make up their minds to see -it out.</p> - -<p>That Leo was very much put out about the affair was -certain. He considered that he was the direct cause of -the whole trouble, and while the fair girl deserved punishment -for her rash and bloody act, he made up his mind -that a jury in any civilized portion of the world would -hardly find her guilty of murder in the first degree. She -might receive a sentence of imprisonment for life, and -probably not as bad as that.</p> - -<p>He concluded to speak to the queen about it, and got -Dick to accompany him to the palace just before the -procession was ready to start for the place of execution.</p> - -<p>She granted him an audience readily enough, but would -not listen to his appeal that she might be a little more -lenient with Azurma.</p> - -<p>“No,” said she, with a decided shake of her head; “she -must die as I have ordered. I cannot; nor would not if -I could, countermand my orders. We are ready to start -now, tell the rest of your companions to fall in line, and -be sure to go with us to see the vile murderess take her -death ride into the Devil’s Kingdom!”</p> - -<p>There was no getting over it, so our friends promptly -fell into line with nearly the entire population of Hez.</p> - -<p>Azurma was then brought forth by two men, and she -cast a look of defiance at Queen Olive and the rest of the -women.</p> - -<p>The word was given, and the procession filed away, the -swamp explorers keeping near the doomed girl, and marveling -at the fortitude she possessed.</p> - -<p>Torches were lighted, and they passed through the -dark passage into the magic chamber.</p> - -<p>Here Azurma turned her gaze upon Leo, and said:</p> - -<p>“It was in this place that I first met you, my Leo. Then -I thought you would be mine, but they robbed me of -you. But I promise, that though they kill me, I will meet -you in another world, and then we will be happy. This I -swear!”</p> - -<p>At this point the girl was hustled on, and deeply impressed -by her words, Leo and his companions followed -with the crowd.</p> - -<p>In a short time the spot that overlooked the place -dubbed the Devil’s Kingdom was reached, and the party -came to a halt.</p> - -<p>A shudder came over Azurma as she surveyed the horrible -place below, but in an instant she had regained her -composure and was as calm as ever.</p> - -<p>The puffs of fire and smoke roared and hissed below -them, and the stream which flowed through the place -seemed to rush along with unusual speed.</p> - -<p>“I am ready to suffer the penalty of my crime, O -queen! It is sweet to die for those we love!”</p> - -<p>It was the doomed girl that spoke, and as she turned -her eyes upon the assemblage her face looked more beautiful -than ever.</p> - -<p>“If you have anything to say, out with it at once,” said -the queen. “According to our ancient laws you must -die, and our laws must not be broken.”</p> - -<p>“I will say this much,” replied Azurma, advancing to -the very edge of the steep, rocky slant: “The women of -Hez have robbed me of the one I love, and now, as I stand -upon the very brink of death, I set my curse upon all who -took part in it. And, furthermore, I do swear that I will -return from the undiscovered country into which I am -now to be hurled, and heap destruction upon all Hez. -This I promise you; and if I do leave this country to find -a haven of rest in another more beautiful one—as I firmly -believe I shall—I will do my best to get the people of -that country to follow me to Hez and aid me in accomplishing -my revenge.”</p> - -<p>She paused for a moment and looked keenly around -to see the effect of her words.</p> - -<p>She was evidently satisfied, for a smile broke over her -beautiful face.</p> - -<p>Then, directing her gaze upon Leo, her lips parted.</p> - -<p>“Farewell, my Leo; forget not what I said in the magic -chamber.”</p> - -<p>The next instant, to the astonishment of all hands, she -turned and sprang over the verge of the awful place and -went gliding toward the flame and smoke below!</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_21">[21]</a></span></p> - -<p>She had cheated the executioners from throwing her -into the Devil’s Kingdom by committing the deed herself.</p> - -<p>Down—down the horrible descent she glided until the -lurid flames hid her from view, and then, with a mighty -splash, the beautiful murderess plunged into the rushing -stream.</p> - -<p>A shudder crept over everyone in the party, and one -and all they turned their heads.</p> - -<p>For fully a minute a deep silence reigned.</p> - -<p>At length it was broken by Queen Olive.</p> - -<p>“Come,” said she, in a strange, unnatural tone, “let’s go -back.”</p> - -<p>Everybody seemed to be willing, so they started at once.</p> - -<p>As soon as they arrived at the village, our friends -sought the seclusion of their own dwelling to talk over -the startling events that had so recently occurred.</p> - -<p>About an hour after darkness set in the younger population -of Hez began moving toward the magic chamber, -and among them were Dick, the professor, Haypole and -Lucky.</p> - -<p>Each of these escorted the fair one to whom he had -been engaged, and the Yankee and the transformed darky -presented an amusing spectacle as they made their way -along in the procession.</p> - -<p>Dick was more or less elated at being at the head of -the line with the beautiful queen at his side, and for the -time being he forgot all about Leo.</p> - -<p>When they reached the magic chamber, he found it -was lighted by a number of brightly burning torches, -stuck in niches in the rocky walls.</p> - -<p>Almost as soon as he and Queen Olive entered a strain -of music struck up, he knew not from where, and he -found his partner and himself leading a fantastic, weird -march.</p> - -<p>Back and forth, through the roomy cavern, they made -their way, the boy doing as the queen directed him.</p> - -<p>At length, after about ten minutes of this sort of thing, -the music suddenly ceased and everybody came to a halt.</p> - -<p>Then it again struck up, and the opening dance began.</p> - -<p>It was very similar to the old-fashioned Virginia reel, -and our friends had little or no difficulty in going through -the figures.</p> - -<p>Prof. Easy seemed to be in his seventh heaven.</p> - -<p>He danced about like a wild man of the woods, and -laughed like a child in possession of a new toy.</p> - -<p>And Martin Haypole. He swung his long legs around -regardless of any mischief he might do, and forgot all -the cares and troubles of his life.</p> - -<p>Lucky was probably the most nimble-footed male on -the floor, and he soon laid all the rest in the shade.</p> - -<p>When the first dance came to an end, Queen Olive informed -Dick that a number of the girls would give the -dance of death—the same that our friends had witnessed -on their arrival in Hez.</p> - -<p>This, she informed him, was always indulged in by -those who were not fortunate enough to have a partner -for life, or a chance of soon having one, at every occasion -like this.</p> - -<p>Now that they knew what was coming, the four were -anxious to see it, and they took seats with those who were -not to participate in it on the stone floor of the cavern.</p> - -<p>It was but a repetition of what they had seen before, -but it was entrancing, for all that.</p> - -<p>The graceful, undulating movements of the gaudily -bedecked creatures seemed to move as if by a strange -mechanism, and when their skeleton partners dropped -down from above, the scene was complete.</p> - -<p>As before, when the thing wound up, a crowd of figures -resembling animals rushed in and seized the girls, and -the skeletons disappeared.</p> - -<p>At the same instant the lights went out and all was in -total darkness.</p> - -<p>This was evidently not on the program, for the audience -gave a cry of alarm, and a number hastened to light -up the scene again. When they had done so it was found -that both Dick and the queen had mysteriously disappeared.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XV_THE_NAZTECS_AND_THEIR_PRISONERS">CHAPTER XV.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">THE NAZTECS AND THEIR PRISONERS.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Reginald Lacy and his faithful dog were swept over -the falls with frightful velocity.</p> - -<p>Jupiter still gripped his master by the collar, and it was -evident that he meant to hang on until death parted them.</p> - -<p>Down the foaming cataract they were carried, and the -terror of his dreadful situation caused Lacy to lose possession -of his faculties.</p> - -<p>When he came to again he found himself lying upon a -strip of sand with his feet in the water.</p> - -<p>Jupiter sat before him, patiently waiting for his master -to come to life and speak to him.</p> - -<p>At first the man thought that he must certainly be injured -in some way, but a single effort on his part showed -him that he was not.</p> - -<p>He rose to his feet but very little the worse for his -journey over the rapids, and patted the dog’s head.</p> - -<p>A slight noise behind him caused him to turn. The next -instant a dozen men sprang upon him and bore him to the -ground.</p> - -<p>Jupiter, the dog, endeavored to render his master some -assistance, but a blow from a heavy club stretched the -animal senseless on a slab of rock.</p> - -<p>Then Lacy’s hands were securely bound behind him, -and his captors, who were a queer-looking set, raised him -to his feet.</p> - -<p>They began talking rapidly in some unknown tongue, -and at length decided to take their prisoner down the decline -to the cave below.</p> - -<p>Lacy did not offer the least resistance, but with a -strange, hunted look in his eyes he walked along with his -captors.</p> - -<p>They took him to a cavern where there were a number -of strange men already assembled, and where Lacy observed -another prisoner lying on the ground, bound hand -and foot.</p> - -<p>After a short consultation, a couple of men walked over -to the prostrate man and liberated him, save untying his -hands.</p> - -<p>Even then the man did not look up, but kept his eyes -fixed on the ground in a sullen manner.</p> - -<p>But Reginald Lacy was gazing at him with a look of -fear upon his face.</p> - -<p>It was his enemy, Philander Owens!</p> - -<p>An order was given, and both prisoners were marched -to the other end of the cave, where an opening was visible.</p> - -<p>Through this went the inhabitants of the underground -world, leading their prisoners with them.</p> - -<p>The strange inhabitants of the place kept on with their -prisoners until they reached a massive building of a purple<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_22">[22]</a></span> -color, which was situated at the end of the single -street contained in the city—if city it could be called.</p> - -<p>Here they came to a halt.</p> - -<p>Then, for the first time, the eyes of Owens rested upon -his fellow captive, and such a look <a id="Corr_22">of hate darted</a> -from them!</p> - -<p>Lacy quailed before him, and in a husky voice said:</p> - -<p>“Aren’t you satisfied yet? Or do you still hate me as -much as ever?”</p> - -<p>“Just as much!” was the reply, in a bitter voice. “Why -shouldn’t I? But never mind—my hour of vengeance -will yet come!”</p> - -<p>“Death stares us both in the face,” said Lacy, in a -calmer tone. “Why not let bygones be bygones?”</p> - -<p>“What! after I went to the expense to purchase a balloon -to hunt you down after you had taken to the Everglades? -Why, you vile hound! I have spent a fortune, -almost, for the purpose of hunting you down. Never! -If I ever hated you, I do now!”</p> - -<p>“As you will,” returned Lacy, becoming more cool -every moment. “But remember, we are both on an equal -footing now.”</p> - -<p>“I would soon show you if we were both free!” exclaimed -Owens, hotly.</p> - -<p>As if he were understood, a richly decked personage -suddenly appeared in the doorway of the purple-hued -building and spoke a few words.</p> - -<p>To the surprise and joy of Owens, his hands were untied.</p> - -<p>Then Lacy was treated in a like manner. The man, -who was evidently the king, was just about to make an -address to his people in regard to the two strangers from -an unknown land, when a startling thing occurred.</p> - -<p>Owens made a sudden leap and seized Lacy by the -throat.</p> - -<p>The men were about of one size and build, and were -evenly matched as far as appearances were.</p> - -<p>Owens was boiling over with rage, while on the contrary -his opponent was perfectly cool and collected.</p> - -<p>Lacy had gripped his foe about the neck, and he strove -to throw him with all his might.</p> - -<p>At the commencement of the sudden encounter between -the two men, the inhabitants of the place were thrown -into a state of dumfounded amazement.</p> - -<p>But at length the king shouted the one word:</p> - -<p>“<em>Naztec!</em>”</p> - -<p>“Naztec, Naztec!” came the response from all hands.</p> - -<p>And in the twinkling of an eye the combatants were -separated and led away in different directions.</p> - -<p>Lacy was conducted to a building on the right and -placed in a small room, where two men promptly placed -themselves to guard against his leaving the place.</p> - -<p>“Naztec!” repeated one of the men, and then motioned -to Lacy that if he would remain passive he would not be -harmed.</p> - -<p>One of the men pointed to a soft couch in a corner of -the room and motioned him to lie down.</p> - -<p>Then it struck Lacy that he was very tired and sleepy, -so he promptly obeyed.</p> - -<p>In a very short time he was fast asleep.</p> - -<p>It must have been ten or twelve hours before he awakened, -and when he did so he felt greatly refreshed.</p> - -<p>As soon as he arose half a dozen men appeared and -conducted him from the room to the street outside.</p> - -<p>He was walked up and down this for about ten minutes -and then returned to the place whence he came.</p> - -<p>A substantial meal was now set before him, and Lacy -ate it in a hearty manner, all the while wondering why -it was that he was receiving such excellent attention.</p> - -<p>But he was destined to soon learn.</p> - -<p>Philander Owens was used exactly the same in another -building not far away, and he, too, wondered why it was -thus and so.</p> - -<p>About twenty-four hours later both ceased to wonder.</p> - -<p>Lacy had risen but an hour before, when he heard the -beating of a tom-tom, or some other outlandish instrument.</p> - -<p>The sum and substance of it was, that the ruler of the -place had arranged for a contest of strength to take place -between the two prisoners.</p> - -<p>He had noticed the savageness with which the men had -come together when they had been brought before him, -and he concluded that if they were fed up a little, and -taken care of, they would be able to give a first-class entertainment -to the populace.</p> - -<p>Owens had been captured a few hours before Lacy -showed up and attempted to roll the bowlder down, but -he had not been taken before the king until they both -were together.</p> - -<p>At the beating of the tom-tom the people of the place -began to gather at the end of the wide street in front -of the purple-hued building, and Lacy and Owens were -each led from the house they had been kept in.</p> - -<p>Owens was clad in a red tunic, while, as has already -been stated, Lacy wore a blue one.</p> - -<p>Both men seemed glad when the king motioned them -to settle what differences they had then and there. One, -because he hated the man who stood before him beyond -the depth of conception; and the other, because he thought -it about time that the thing was settled.</p> - -<p>Instead of grappling with each other, the two men -began sparring for an opening.</p> - -<p>At length Lacy planted a stinging blow on his adversary’s -nose, causing the blood to flow freely.</p> - -<p>“Naztec!” yelled the crowd, applauding wildly.</p> - -<p>Stung to madness, Owens made a sudden dive to the -left and seized a knife from the belt of a man standing -near.</p> - -<p>With a look of fury in his eyes, he sprang upon Lacy, -and raised the weapon to plunge it in his heart.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XVI_DICK_AND_THE_QUEEN_IN_PERIL">CHAPTER XVI.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">DICK AND THE QUEEN IN PERIL.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>It is now about time that the mysterious disappearance -of Dick Vincey and the Queen of Hez was explained.</p> - -<p>The very instant the torches were extinguished in the -magic chamber the two were seized and borne to the earth.</p> - -<p>Before they could cry out, gags were thrust in their -mouths, and then in the confusion that prevailed they -were carried rapidly from the spot.</p> - -<p>Dick strove manfully to free himself, but it was useless; -a heavy cloth had been wound tightly around his body, -rendering him powerless to use his arms.</p> - -<p>The pair were carried swiftly along for about half an -hour, through innumerable passages and tunnels, until -at length they reached a spot where it was light.</p> - -<p>But it was not the light made by burning torches—it -looked more, to Dick, as though he was being carried -through a street with a plentiful supply of electric lights -in it.</p> - -<p>However, his eyes were gladdened by the light but for<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_23">[23]</a></span> -a minute or so. The next instant their captors entered a -cave, where all was in darkness, and came to a halt.</p> - -<p>The two prisoners were deposited upon the hard -ground as though they had been mere bundles of rags, -and then those who had brought them thence took their -departure.</p> - -<p>For fully an hour the utmost silence reigned, and then -it was suddenly broken by the sound of approaching footsteps.</p> - -<p>Both Dick and his fair companion were beginning to -suffer from their cramped positions, and they breathed a -sigh of relief when they heard some one coming.</p> - -<p>A moment later a lighted torch came in view, and a -dozen Hez maidens appeared on the scene.</p> - -<p>They were those who had balloted for husbands and -who had been disappointed.</p> - -<p>Dick saw it all now. They were evidently dissatisfied -with the queen choosing him without allowing them a -voice in the matter, and they had now taken the law in -their own hands.</p> - -<p>The boy was right. Such was really the case. The -twelve maidens who now stood before them had conspired -together and broken the laws of the Land of Hez.</p> - -<p>They had caused the couple to be brought to this out-of-the-way -place to force Queen Olive to give Dick over -to them, and then swear to let the matter drop forever.</p> - -<p>In case she refused, the two were to be left in the cave -to perish, while the conspirators would go back to the -village and circulate the rumor that their queen, being -unable to wait until the two years had passed, had fled -to the outside world with her lover.</p> - -<p>That this story would be believed by the simple Hez -people there was not the least particle of doubt.</p> - -<p>The leader of the twelve maidens was Queen Olive’s -younger sister—heir to the throne!</p> - -<p>It was she who acted as speaker for her companions, -and after having removed the gags from the mouths of -the two prisoners, so they would be able to answer her, -she proceeded to inform them of the reason they had been -abducted from the magic chamber.</p> - -<p>“Our plan was well carried out,” said she, “and the -twelve here assembled are the ones that did it. We have -rebelled against the throne, and unless you agree to our -terms, you must lie in this cave, bound as you are, to furnish -food for the dreaded picuasus. What is your answer, -my sister?”</p> - -<p>The eyes of the queen flashed with rage that was intense, -and for a moment she could not find words to -make a reply.</p> - -<p>But finally she calmed herself and said:</p> - -<p>“My answer is this, base conspirators! I will not agree -to your terms, even though you do leave me here to die, -which you dare not do.”</p> - -<p>“Dare not? We will show you. I will give you just -five minutes to consider your reply, and if in that time -you do not agree, we will certainly leave you both here—unless -the young man whom you have chosen for your -husband desires to accept one of us, and will take an oath -not to reveal what has happened.”</p> - -<p>“I will not do that!” said Dick, hotly. “Do your worst, -you she-fiends; we will triumph in the end.”</p> - -<p>“Nobly spoken, my brave young lover!” spoke up the -queen. “It will be as you say—we will triumph in the -end.”</p> - -<p>There was no reply to this until the five minutes had -elapsed, and then the queen’s sister, with a perfectly immovable -face, spoke up.</p> - -<p>“What is your decision?” she asked, coolly.</p> - -<p>“You have it already. Free us immediately, or I give -you my word that every one of you shall suffer the fate of -Azurma.”</p> - -<p>There was a ripple of mocking laughter at this, and the -leader of the conspirators went on:</p> - -<p>“Is that your final answer?”</p> - -<p>“It is.”</p> - -<p>“Be it so, then. From this time forward I am the -queen of the Land of Hez. Farewell, my sister. May you -and your lover enjoy the agonies of death you have so -freely chosen!”</p> - -<p>This nerved Dick to a feeling of desperation, and he -strove to free himself with all his might.</p> - -<p>But it was utterly useless; the heavy cloth that bound -his hands to his sides was too firmly wound about him.</p> - -<p>Then, too, his legs were secured in the same manner, -and he soon found that he could scarcely even turn over.</p> - -<p>“It is useless,” he said, panting from his exertions. -“We have got to die!”</p> - -<p>“Oh, say not so,” wailed the queen, and she fell back -in a faint.</p> - -<p>And Dick! He relaxed his muscles and fell into as -comfortable a position as was possible, and set to thinking -over their situation.</p> - -<p>What worried him most was what the queen’s sister had -said about them furnishing a meal for the dreaded picuasus.</p> - -<p>He had heard about those monsters from Leo, and that -he and his beautiful companion were in the limits of the -domain of the horrible turtle spiders he felt certain.</p> - -<p>What if one of them should come prowling that way -now?</p> - -<p>The thought was maddening to Dick, and he again -strove to free himself.</p> - -<p>But after five minutes of fruitless endeavor he fell -back exhausted.</p> - -<p>Soon after this he fell into a troubled sleep, from -which he did not awaken until some hours had elapsed.</p> - -<p>He felt cramped and sore, and soon as the full sense -of his situation came to him, he listened intently.</p> - -<p>But not a sound could be heard, save the regular -breathing of the girl at his side, who was now sleeping -peacefully.</p> - -<p>He determined not to disturb her slumber, and so did -not attempt to burst his bonds again.</p> - -<p>The seconds flitted into minutes, and the minutes into -hours, and still there was no change.</p> - -<p>Had it not been for Queen Olive’s regular breathing, -Dick would have thought her dead.</p> - -<p>“Let her sleep,” he thought. “She is now entirely -oblivious to our horrible situation, and if I wake her up, -she will only rave and go on at a great rate.”</p> - -<p>About five minutes later the boy heard a sound which -sent a thrill through his body.</p> - -<p>A faint pit-pat could be heard, which told him that -some living creature was approaching.</p> - -<p>“The picuasus!” he muttered to himself. “Well, it will -soon be over.”</p> - -<p>Nearer and nearer the sounds came, and presently the -boy’s instinct told him that the animal, or whatever it -was, had halted within a few feet of him.</p> - -<p>The next moment he felt the cold nose of the creature -touching his face!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_24">[24]</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XVII_AZURMA_AND_THE_NAZTECS">CHAPTER XVII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">AZURMA AND THE NAZTECS.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Azurma, the beautiful murderess, had jumped upon the -rocky slide with the firm conviction that she was going -to her death.</p> - -<p>She held her breath and closed her eyes during the -fearful descent.</p> - -<p>When she had passed through the flames and found -herself comparatively uninjured, a sudden hope arose in -her breast that she might come out all right yet.</p> - -<p>This thought no sooner entered her mind than she -struck the water with a splash and sank below its surface.</p> - -<p>Down, down, the girl went, for many feet.</p> - -<p>When she struggled to the surface again she was at -least two hundred yards from the place where she had -fallen in.</p> - -<p>Blinded and half choked, she kept her head above the -water, and in a few seconds she was beyond the limits of -the roaring fire and smoke.</p> - -<p>The girl did not offer to struggle in the least, but allowed -the merciless current to carry her along at its will.</p> - -<p>This was the wisest thing she could do, for it left her -what strength she possessed to be used later on.</p> - -<p>On she whirled, the current running so strong that she -kept on top of the water without the least effort on her -part.</p> - -<p>In a few more seconds the falls will be reached.</p> - -<p>Azurma hears the angry roar of the tide in her ears, and -prepares herself for the worst.</p> - -<p>She lifts her head for a single instant, and sees the -foaming crest but a few yards distant.</p> - -<p>The next minute, with a rush and a roar, she is carried -over.</p> - -<p>Contrary to her expectations, she is not dashed to a -shapeless mass upon a bed of jagged rocks, but finds herself -struggling in a lake of comparatively still water.</p> - -<p>Azurma knew how to swim, and, after brushing her -long tresses from her eyes, she drew a long breath and -started for the shore, close at hand.</p> - -<p>Faint and exhausted, she reached it, and sank upon -the ground in a semi-unconscious condition.</p> - -<p>She was aroused to her full senses presently by hearing -the pattering made by some animal running toward -her.</p> - -<p>In an instant she sprang to her feet.</p> - -<p>A cry of joy escaped her lips.</p> - -<p>Coming toward her was Jupiter, the dog she had seen -go over the falls with his master the day before.</p> - -<p>The animal came directly to her feet and lay down, -acting in a very strange manner. His head was covered -plentifully with clotted blood, showing the girl that he -was suffering from a severe wound.</p> - -<p>Lying upon the ground, he looked her in the face and -whined in a piteous manner.</p> - -<p>“Poor dog,” said Azurma. “What has become of your -master? Is he dead? If not, take me to him.”</p> - -<p>She waved her hand for the dog to get up and lead -the way.</p> - -<p>He seemed to comprehend her meaning, but acted in a -dazed sort of way.</p> - -<p>Running away from her for about fifty yards, he suddenly -turned and made a circle, and then rolled over and -over upon the ground.</p> - -<p>Instead of being frightened at these strange actions, -Azurma became interested.</p> - -<p>Instinct told her that something unusual ailed the dog.</p> - -<p>She made up her mind to find out what it was, if possible.</p> - -<p>Quickly making her way to his side, she talked to him -in a soothing manner, and then proceeded to examine the -wound on his head.</p> - -<p>A moment’s inspection sufficed to show her that the -animal’s skull had received a fracture, and that a part of -the bone was depressed.</p> - -<p>Something told her that if she could lift the piece of -bone back to its place, Jupiter would be all right.</p> - -<p>A needle-like instrument was pinned to the white, gauzy -sash about her waist, and with this she endeavored to do -the job.</p> - -<p>Though she knew little or nothing about surgery, she -was successful.</p> - -<p>The dog howled piteously during the operation, but did -not offer to prevent her from doing it.</p> - -<p>When it was finished he rolled over on his side and appeared -to fall into a deep sleep. The girl bathed the dog’s -wound with her water-soaked garments, and then seated -herself by his side to await developments.</p> - -<p>It must have been an hour before the dog began to -show signs of awakening, and as soon as he did, Azurma, -who had heard Reginald Lacy call him by name, arose to -her feet.</p> - -<p>“Come, Jupiter; show me where your master is.”</p> - -<p>The animal seemed to have fully recovered; he began -springing about her feet, uttering his quick, sharp barks -in a joyful manner.</p> - -<p>Then, catching Azurma by the dress, he attempted to -pull her along after him in the direction of the opening -where the light came from.</p> - -<p>“I’ll go with you willingly,” said the girl, catching on -to the idea that Lacy was somewhere in that direction.</p> - -<p>Away they went, the faithful dog leading, and ever -and anon turning around to see if Azurma was still following.</p> - -<p>In this manner they soon reached the identical place -Lacy had entered several hours previously.</p> - -<p>Azurma was very much puzzled at her surroundings. -She, nor none of her people, had ever been in that portion -of the underground country before, but she could plainly -see the tracks made by Lacy, and concluded to follow as -far as Jupiter chose to lead her.</p> - -<p>Along through the lighted passage they went until they -arrived at the point where Lacy had been pounced upon -and captured by the Naztecs when in the act of hurling -the bowlder down upon the defenseless form of his enemy.</p> - -<p>Azurma’s quick eye told her that a struggle had taken -place here, for she found the shred of a garment, evidently -a piece of the shirt Lacy wore, while upon the ground was -a clot of blood.</p> - -<p>But as she could find no more of the latter, she rightly -judged that it had come from the dog.</p> - -<p>A strange light shone in the girl’s eyes as she surveyed -her surroundings.</p> - -<p>“Is it possible that the last words I addressed to the -women of Hez will come true?” she asked herself. “I -have escaped death, and am now in the limits of another -country, where people must certainly live, for they were -not animals who carried off the dog’s master and left the -poor creature lying here for dead. I will go down there -where it is so light; Jupiter seems anxious to go, and I -will follow.”</p> - -<p>Without any further hesitation she started down the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> -descent, and at length stood in the cave in which Owens -had been lying bound hand and foot.</p> - -<p>But the place was deserted now, and Azurma followed -the dog through the opening at the other side, and stepped -into the single street of the strange, little city.</p> - -<p>The scene that met the girl’s eyes was so entirely different -to what she had anticipated that for a moment she -was completely bewildered.</p> - -<p>But not so with the dog.</p> - -<p>He gave a single bark and dashed away with the speed -of the wind toward the further end of the street, where -a large number of people were congregated.</p> - -<p>It was at this identical moment that the contest of -strength between Reginald Lacy and Philander Owens -was about to take place.</p> - -<p>Jupiter reached the spot just as the enraged Owens -was about to plunge the gleaming blade into his master’s -heart.</p> - -<p>With a mighty bound the animal sprang upon the -would-be assassin and bore him to the ground.</p> - -<p>Then, but for the interposition of a number of the -Naztecs, he would have literally torn him to pieces.</p> - -<p>As it was, Owens’ shoulder was so badly lacerated by -the dog’s teeth that he had to be carried from the place -in a semi-conscious condition.</p> - -<p>Lacy staggered to the side of Jupiter and hugged him -as a mother would her child.</p> - -<p>The Naztecs gazed upon the scene with a look of wonderment -in their eyes.</p> - -<p>True, they had such things as dogs in their country, but -none like the faithful animal who was now before them, -and who had saved his master’s life!</p> - -<p>At a signal from the king, or ruler, of the place, the -crowd clapped their hands in a burst of applause, and then -began singing a sort of chant.</p> - -<p>At this moment Azurma, who had hitherto been unobserved, -came upon them.</p> - -<p>Reginald Lacy was one of the first to notice her, and -when he did so he gave a start of surprise.</p> - -<p>She had joined the Naztecs in singing the chant, and -appeared to be perfectly acquainted with it.</p> - -<p>The moment the king laid his eyes upon the newcomer, -he made a sudden signal, and everybody, save -Lacy and the girl herself, dropped upon their knees.</p> - -<p>Azurma seemed as much astonished as Lacy at the -proceedings, but she did not hesitate to shake hands with -the man who had preceded her to the queer country.</p> - -<p>“Do you know these people?” asked Lacy, quickly.</p> - -<p>“No; I never saw nor heard of them before.”</p> - -<p>“Do you understand their language?”</p> - -<p>“I know the chant they were singing. It was learned -to the people of Hez by Roderique de Amilo, the founder -of the race.”</p> - -<p>“Oh!” exclaimed the man, brightening up; “if that is -the case, you can, most likely, make yourself understood -to them. Are you acquainted with the language in which -the chant is sung?”</p> - -<p>“I am.”</p> - -<p>“Then advance to that man over there and ask him -who and what they are, and what they are going to do -with us.”</p> - -<p>He pointed to the king, who stood with bowed head, as -he spoke.</p> - -<p>Azurma at once obeyed, and when she began talking -the king lifted his head and nodded in a pleased manner.</p> - -<p>He replied to all the girls’ questions, who, in turn, translated -the conversation to Lacy.</p> - -<p>The substance of it was that the people were really -called Naztecs, and that their race had been in existence -for hundreds of years.</p> - -<p>For the past century the population had gradually -dwindled, from some unknown cause, and they now numbered -scarcely seven hundred, all told.</p> - -<p>Many, many years before, the king said, one of their -beautiful maidens had disappeared, leaving word that she -would surely come back, or else send some one in her -place, who was as beautiful as her, in some future generation.</p> - -<p>This had been recorded by the forefathers of the Naztecs, -and, consequently, they were always on the lookout -for the girl to turn up.</p> - -<p>When they saw Azurma they took it for granted that -she was the one sent in place of the lost maiden of ages -before.</p> - -<p>With this brief explanation we will proceed.</p> - -<p>Azurma was cute enough to allow the Naztecs to believe -that she was really the one they took her to be.</p> - -<p>By so doing she came in possession of a power which -she would not otherwise have had.</p> - -<p>She had no difficulty in persuading the king to set Lacy -and his dog free, and give them the privilege of going -anywhere about the city.</p> - -<p>She told his royal highness where she had come from, -and he at once set forth his desire to visit Hez, if possible.</p> - -<p>Whereupon Azurma set her people down as a bloodthirsty -race, and offered to lead the Naztecs upon them at -some future day, and exterminate them.</p> - -<p>This seemed to satisfy the king, and he gave orders that -hereafter Azurma should be treated as a princess.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XVIII_WHAT_HAPPENED_TO_DICK_AND_QUEEN_OLIVE">CHAPTER XVIII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">WHAT HAPPENED TO DICK AND QUEEN OLIVE.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>When Dick Vincey felt the cold snout of an animal -touching his face, a convulsive shudder ran over his -body.</p> - -<p>He thought that his earthly career was ended, for a -certainty.</p> - -<p>But, instead of being seized and torn to pieces by the -horrible picuasus, as he supposed it to be, the animal uttered -a low whine, and began licking his face.</p> - -<p>Almost at the same instant the boy heard footsteps approaching.</p> - -<p>Then it flashed across his mind that the animal who -stood over him must be a dog.</p> - -<p>He opened his eyes and strove in vain to pierce the -inky darkness and see what it was.</p> - -<p>The footsteps were coming nearer all the time, and fearful -that the person who was approaching might turn in -some other direction, Dick shouted out:</p> - -<p>“Help!”</p> - -<p>Queen Olive awoke with a wild cry of alarm on her -lips, and tremblingly asked Dick what had happened.</p> - -<p>Before he could reply, a light flashed up and illumined -the cave, almost blinding the two prisoners for a moment.</p> - -<p>But this soon passed off, and they saw a man, attired -in a fantastic garb of limited extent, hurrying toward -them.</p> - -<p>A huge dog was standing over Dick, which the boy<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_26">[26]</a></span> -recognized at once as Jupiter, the dog he had seen go over -the falls with his master.</p> - -<p>But when the man halted in front of them and held his -lighted torch near their faces, a cry of astonishment, intermingled -with joy, left the boy prisoner’s lips.</p> - -<p>It was no other than Reginald Lacy himself who stood -before them.</p> - -<p>Lacy seemed to be as much surprised as Dick, but drawing -a knife from his belt, he quickly severed the bonds that -held the couple prisoners.</p> - -<p>“How came you here?” he asked, as Dick arose to his -feet and patted Jupiter on the head.</p> - -<p>“You shall hear the whole story,” was the reply; “but -let us first get out of this place. I, for one, have had -quite enough of it to last the rest of my life. Come, Olive, -we are saved!”</p> - -<p>Without any further ado, Lacy led the way out of the -cave, going through a long, dark passage, the mouth of -which opened into the vast cavern just above the falls.</p> - -<p>Once here, Dick breathed a sigh of relief.</p> - -<p>“Now, Mr. Lacy,” said he, “I will tell you how the -queen of Hez and myself came to be in the predicament -you found us.”</p> - -<p>He then related, in as few words as possible, all that -had transpired in the past few hours, winding up by asking -Lacy how he and the dog escaped death when they -went whirling over the falls.</p> - -<p>“That is easily explained,” returned Reginald Lacy, -with a smile. “There were no rocks at the foot of the -falls, and, consequently, the danger of going over them -is not great. There is another person who went safely -over them since I did.”</p> - -<p>“Who was it?” asked Dick. “Surely not Azurma?”</p> - -<p>“But it was, just the same. She is now living, and is -as hale and hearty as she ever was.”</p> - -<p>“Where is she?” asked Queen Olive, in an interested -manner.</p> - -<p>“In the city of the Naztecs, a few miles from here.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” gasped Dick, in astonishment.</p> - -<p>“Exactly what I say, my boy. There is a race of people, -similar in character to those who live in the Land of -Hez, not far from here. Their city is my home for the -present, as well as that of Azurma. But come, we had -better be moving from here; there is no telling when one -of those big turtle spiders might show up. What do you -say if you both accompany me to the city of the Naztecs? -I’ll guarantee that you will be used well.”</p> - -<p>“We will go!” said Queen Olive, suddenly. “It would -not do for me to go back to Hez at this late hour. The -people would scarcely believe the abduction, and it is hard -to tell exactly what might take place.”</p> - -<p>“Lead the way, Mr. Lacy,” spoke up Dick. “I am satisfied -with anything. This is a country of wonder and -mystery, and I desire to see all I can of it.”</p> - -<p>Reginald Lacy had left the city with his dog to make -an exploration of the surrounding country.</p> - -<p>Unconsciously his steps led him to the spot where Dick -and his fair companion lay bound hand and foot.</p> - -<p>But it was Jupiter’s fault more than his own that he -came that far away from the little city.</p> - -<p>The dog wanted to pursue an upward course, and Lacy -allowed him to have his way.</p> - -<p>He had passed through many caverns and chambers, -and were it not for the dog, he knew that he would never -be able to find his way back again.</p> - -<p>But Jupiter was a dog that could be depended upon, and -no one knew this better than his master.</p> - -<p>Lacy was very much pleased at finding Dick, and as -they threaded their way through the mazes of the underground -world, he told the boy about the presence of Philander -Owens in the city they were bound for.</p> - -<p>“I wish,” said he, “that you would see him, and endeavor -to get him to let what has passed be forgotten. -He is very bitter against me, though for what reason it is -not likely that anybody, save the pair of us, will ever -know.”</p> - -<p>“I will do all I can,” returned Dick.</p> - -<p>The beautiful queen spoke never a word during the -descent into the valley below.</p> - -<p>That she was becoming weary and footsore was plainly -evident by the manner in which she clung to Dick’s arm.</p> - -<p>She was as much puzzled as Dick when they entered the -lighted chamber and started through it.</p> - -<p>But when they came to what lay beyond she could -scarcely believe her senses.</p> - -<p>She had never laid eyes upon such buildings as the -little city contained, and could hardly bring herself to believe -that she was not dreaming.</p> - -<p>With Dick it was different. He was not surprised at -anything, but took every new thing he saw the same as -though he had always been aware of its existence.</p> - -<p>As Lacy and his dog entered the city with the two -strangers, much excitement was manifested by the Naztecs.</p> - -<p>They crowded around the newcomers, and began asking -all sorts of questions in their peculiar language.</p> - -<p>Queen Olive understood it perfectly, and she lost no -time in giving them all the information they desired.</p> - -<p>Attracted by the confusion outside, Azurma came forth -from the room assigned to her in the purple-hued building.</p> - -<p>As soon as she observed who the strangers were, a cry -of joy left her lips, and she rushed to them.</p> - -<p>“Where is Leo? Did he not come with you?” she -asked of Dick.</p> - -<p>“No, he did not,” was the reply. “So you escaped -death, after all, Azurma?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but no thanks to her who condemned me to -death!” said the girl, looking at her former queen.</p> - -<p>“Was it my fault that you were condemned to death?” -asked Queen Olive, in a calm voice.</p> - -<p>“No,” replied the girl, after a moment’s thought. “Forgive -me for speaking as I did. You did but your duty.”</p> - -<p>Then, as is generally the case, the two women embraced -each other, and were more friendly than they had ever -been before.</p> - -<p>The Naztecs seemed very proud of their visitors, and -treated them with the utmost kindness.</p> - -<p>They were also given rooms in the palace, and a royal -reception was held in their honor.</p> - -<p>But though Dick was treated after the manner of a -prince, and had the girl he loved near him, he was yet -far from being happy.</p> - -<p>Had he been in his own country, with Leo and the rest -of his associates about him, it would have been different.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XIX_LEO_WEDS_AFTER_ALL">CHAPTER XIX.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">LEO WEDS, AFTER ALL.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>When the new queen had reigned for a year, she one -day took it in her head to modify one of the principal laws -of Hez.</p> - -<p>It was to change the time of the maidens waiting for -their husbands from two years to six months.</p> - -<p>As this was more of a common-sense view of the matter, -her people unanimously agreed to it, with the exception -of Roderique de Amilo.</p> - -<p>He was for keeping the ancient laws of the country the -same.</p> - -<p>But one against so many did not amount to much, so -the law went into force.</p> - -<p>Elated by the favor with which her new law was received, -the queen, whose name, by the way, was Nalie, -concluded to make another change, and a big one, at that.</p> - -<p>Hitherto none of the males born in Hez had been allowed -to marry under any consideration.</p> - -<p>Consequently the race was fast dying out, as very few -men from the outside world came to the strange country, -and when they did, it was merely by accident.</p> - -<p>When her majesty issued this edict, she announced that -her reason for doing so was to keep the race in existence -forever.</p> - -<p>This, too, met with the approval of the Hezzians.</p> - -<p>The day soon arrived which the queen had fixed when -all those who desired to enter a state of matrimony could -do so, and nearly all the unmarried ones took advantage -of it.</p> - -<p>The building in which dwelt the supposed founder of -the Hez race, Roderique de Amilo, who was to perform -the ceremony, was a circular one, and contained but two -rooms. The rest of the space was taken up by a broad -hall, which opened at either end of the house.</p> - -<p>There were no seats of any kind in the hall, and, consequently, -all had to stand up.</p> - -<p>When Leo, whom the queen had chosen for her future -husband, and Nalie arrived, De Amilo had just commenced -to marry some of the Hezzians to the maidens -they had chosen.</p> - -<p>The ceremony was about the same as the Spanish one -of to-day, only it was somewhat shorter.</p> - -<p>The couples were married as fast as the acting priest -could rattle off the words of the ceremony, and sent away -happy.</p> - -<p>At length it came Prof. Easy’s turn, and with his face -wreathed in smiles, he stepped up to the scratch with his -blushing, young bride leaning upon his arm.</p> - -<p>As soon as the knot was tied, they marched off to the -little house that had been assigned to them.</p> - -<p>Next came Martin Haypole, and then Lucky.</p> - -<p>When these had been disposed of, there was but one -couple left, and that was Leo and the queen.</p> - -<p>A few had remained to see their ruler married, but the -majority had gone away to their usual avocations.</p> - -<p>As Leo and his fair companion stepped to the front, -there was a disturbance at one end of the hall, and a figure -rushed in.</p> - -<p>Leo turned hastily around, and a cry of astonishment -left his lips.</p> - -<p>It was Azurma, the girl whom he thought dead, who -had rushed in.</p> - -<p>She stood in front of Queen Nalie with uplifted hands, -but not a word escaped her lips.</p> - -<p>Everybody in the building recognized her, and a wild -yell of terror went up.</p> - -<p>Down upon their faces went all save Leo, who was -thunderstruck, but not frightened in the least.</p> - -<p>Azurma glided to him, and, placing her hand upon his -shoulder, said:</p> - -<p>“Come, my Leo; I will take you to your cousin Dick, -who yet lives.”</p> - -<p>Hardly knowing what he did, the boy followed her -from the building.</p> - -<p>No one barred their progress, and in a couple of minutes -they had entered one of the numerous passages, and -were lost to view.</p> - -<p>Leo followed Azurma through the passage without -saying a word.</p> - -<p>He was very much mystified at the girl’s sudden appearance.</p> - -<p>Over a year before she had been condemned to death, -and he had seen her with his own eyes go shooting into -the turbulent stream that flowed through the Devil’s Kingdom.</p> - -<p>He remembered Azurma’s last words, as he followed -her along, and he began to think that not only the Land -of Hez was one of mystery, but the ones who lived in it -mysterious, also.</p> - -<p>The girl clung to his arm and did not offer to speak -until they had reached a point fully a mile from the -village governed by Queen Nalie.</p> - -<p>Azurma related her miraculous escape, and told how -she reached the land of the Naztecs, how Reginald Lacy -and his dog had found Dick and Queen Olive in the cave, -and wound up by saying that both she and Queen Olive -had been created princesses in the Naztec nation, and that -Dick had been the king’s adviser for the past seven -months.</p> - -<p>She also informed him that Philander Owens was a resident -of the city, and that he and Reginald Lacy had buried -the hatchet, and were now fast friends.</p> - -<p>They had married sisters, she said, and lived in the -same house.</p> - -<p>All this was startling news to Leo, and he longed for -the moment when he could meet Dick and embrace him.</p> - -<p>Azurma, who knew the way perfectly, led him to the -grounds near the foot of the falls, by way of the rocky -descent near the Devil’s Kingdom.</p> - -<p>In a little over an hour from the time the two left Hez -they reached the mouth of the long, lighted chamber leading -to the strange underground city.</p> - -<p>Before they were halfway through this they met Reginald -Lacy and Jupiter, the dog.</p> - -<p>The meeting between Leo and Lacy was a very pleasant -one, and the faithful dog, who recognized the young fellow -at once, pranced playfully about his feet.</p> - -<p>“Come,” said Lacy, leading the way—“come and see -what you think of our city.”</p> - -<p>They reached the end of the wide passage and descended -into the cave below.</p> - -<p>Leo was not a little astonished at what he saw, and -when he reached the center of the little place he could not -suppress a cry of admiration.</p> - -<p>The meeting between the cousins was a joyous, not to -say affecting, one.</p> - -<p>Leo had supposed Dick to be dead, and Dick had worried -considerably as to how Leo was getting on in Hez.</p> - -<p>Leo’s surprise was complete when Olive—as we will<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_28">[28]</a></span> -hereafter call the ex-queen of Hez—came forth, carrying -an infant son about a month old in her arms.</p> - -<p>“This is my wife and son, Leo,” said Dick. “The -youngster is named after you. What do you think of -him?”</p> - -<p>“What do I think of him? I congratulate you, old -fellow! Why, it don’t seem possible that you are a man -of family. And your wife! Well, she hasn’t lost any of -her good looks. I tell you, wonders will never cease. I -am the only single man left in our party of swamp explorers -now.”</p> - -<p>“Is that so?” asked Dick. “I thought that none of -them could marry until two years had elapsed.”</p> - -<p>“The new queen changed the law. The professor, Haypole -and Lucky were married to-day; and if Azurma had -not showed up just as she did, I, too, would have been a -benedict.”</p> - -<p>“Who was to have been the bride?” asked Olive.</p> - -<p>“Your sister—Queen Nalie.”</p> - -<p>“Ah! Was it an act of your own free will and accord?”</p> - -<p>“No, hardly;” and Leo explained the whole circumstance -from beginning to end.</p> - -<p>“How is the new queen liked by the people of Hez?”</p> - -<p>“Very well, I guess.”</p> - -<p>“Do you know one thing?”—and Dick’s wife called Leo -aside. “I have agreed to leave this underground world -with my husband, if we can find a way to get out, and -go, with him to the land of his own people. He is making -arrangements to lead a number of the men of this place -to Hez and capture it. That once done, he says, he can -easily find some means of getting to the outside world.”</p> - -<p>“That’s true, old fellow, chimed in Dick.</p> - -<p>“I now have eighty good fighting men at my command, -and I think we shall be able to down the Hezzians, even -if they do outnumber us.”</p> - -<p>“You can count on me to do my part, I assure you,” -said Leo.</p> - -<p>The Naztecs seemed to be pleased at another addition -to their number.</p> - -<p>Dick, Lacy and Owens had taught them many things -they had been entirely ignorant of; and as they were an -intelligent race, they were constantly on the lookout to -learn something new.</p> - -<p>Leo now appeared to be more contented than he had -at any time since he came to the land of mystery.</p> - -<p>He soon got used to the mode of living in the country -of the Naztecs, and, like his predecessors, soon acquired -their language.</p> - -<p>There was only one thing that bothered him, save his -desire to get to his native heath once more, and that was -the undying love Azurma bore him.</p> - -<p>He liked the girl well enough; but, unlike Dick, he did -not allow himself to become “gone” on any of the beauties -of the strange land.</p> - -<p>But duty told him that he ought to marry the girl, for -she was growing thinner every day, and all on account of -him.</p> - -<p>He concluded to wed her, and make the best of it, and -one day, about three weeks after his advent into the -Naztec country, Leo and Azurma were made man and -wife according to the established rules of the country.</p> - -<p>There never was a happier bride in the whole world -than Azurma; and from that time until the day of her -death Leo never regretted marrying her.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XX_MANUFACTURING_A_CANNON">CHAPTER XX.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">MANUFACTURING A CANNON.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Leo Malvern had not been long in the city of the Naztecs -ere he began to assist Dick in training the men how -to fight.</p> - -<p>Like his cousin, he desired to make his way to the Land -of Hez and force a way to the outside world.</p> - -<p>Neither allowed the Naztecs to become aware of what -their intentions were after they had once defeated the -Hezzians in battle, but trusted to luck to leave them in -possession of Hez and force their way out.</p> - -<p>While working about the soil near the city, Dick had -discovered the materials for making a first-class blasting -powder, and by means of this they hoped to blow open -the door in the obelisk and thus find their way to freedom.</p> - -<p>The discovery of a combustible substance that could be -set off by a spark set Philander Owens to thinking.</p> - -<p>He knew full well that the men of Hez outnumbered the -party Dick and Leo intended to lead against them, by -three or four to one.</p> - -<p>Consequently, something more powerful in the line of -weapons than spears and axes must be introduced.</p> - -<p>Owens was an inventive sort of genius, and it did not -take him long to figure out how a destructive weapon -could be made.</p> - -<p>There was a bed of copper ore in the vicinity of the -underground city of the Naztecs, and Owens went to -work mining a quantity of this.</p> - -<p>He did not inform anyone of his intentions until he was -forced to for want of help in his undertaking.</p> - -<p>One day he called Dick and Leo aside and said:</p> - -<p>“Are you most ready to march upon the Hezzians and -fight your way to the outside world?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Dick; “we have got the eighty men pretty -well drilled now.”</p> - -<p>“If we had a nice, little cannon—say a ten-pounder—we -could work our way through them nicely, couldn’t -we?”</p> - -<p>“I should say we could!” exclaimed Leo. “But why -do you speak of such a thing when it is entirely out of -the question?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think it is out of the question, my boy.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” asked Dick, with wide-open -eyes.</p> - -<p>“I mean just this—I am going to cast a gun.”</p> - -<p>The cousins were too much astonished to speak, but -when Owens went on and explained his plans, they fell -in with him, heart and soul.</p> - -<p>The first thing to do now was to procure something to -melt the ore in.</p> - -<p>Dick concluded to ask the king for what he wanted, and -he accordingly did so, telling him that it would add to -their advantage in routing the Hezzians when the attack -was made.</p> - -<p>“There is naught in the city that would serve for such -a purpose, unless it be in the sacred cave.”</p> - -<p>“Where is that?” asked Dick.</p> - -<p>“On the hillside, at the south of the city.”</p> - -<p>“Will you allow me to go there and see if I can find -what I want?”</p> - -<p>“Wait,” said the king; “let me tell you about the sacred -cave. The mouth of it is sealed, and has been for many, -many years. It was decreed by a former king that no -person of the Naztec nation should ever break the seal<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_29">[29]</a></span> -and enter it. It contains all the articles required for -smelting copper, silver, gold and other metals. At that -time working in metals was one of the principal industries -of the place, since it was then that the houses in the city -were built.</p> - -<p>“You will observe that they are all built of stone and -metal. The metal, of course, had to be cast to be wrought -into its proper shape. And so it went on, till the houses -were all done, and the city of the Naztecs completed. -Then it was that the king issued the edict that all the -smelting appurtenances should be placed in the cave and -its entrance sealed.”</p> - -<p>“That’s quite an interesting story, I assure you,” remarked -Dick. “Then, if what you say is true, the very -things we need are in the cave.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but we dare not open it.”</p> - -<p>“None of the Naztec nation dare do it, you mean.”</p> - -<p>“Exactly.”</p> - -<p>“But I am not of the Naztec nation. I may open it, I -suppose?”</p> - -<p>The king thought a moment, and then said:</p> - -<p>“As you please. I will neither tell you to do it nor not -to do it. I trust that you will in due time get your -weapon of warfare constructed, though.”</p> - -<p>That settled it.</p> - -<p>Dick at once repaired to Leo and Philander Owens, -and told them what he had learned.</p> - -<p>Reginald Lacy was sought, and together the four repaired -to the sacred cave.</p> - -<p>They had no difficulty in finding it, since the king had -told Dick exactly where it was.</p> - -<p>By dint of using a couple of heavy, metal bars, they -managed to pry a stone from the entrance, which was -sealed with a substance like cement.</p> - -<p>When the stone was rolled sufficiently aside, a cry of -joy escaped the lips of the four.</p> - -<p>The cave was evidently just as it had been left when -the workers in metal had completed their job so many -years before.</p> - -<p>It contained a pair of huge furnaces, crucibles, ladles -for dipping out the molten metal, and everything needful.</p> - -<p>But all these things were quaint and very ancient in -appearance, reminding our friends of what they had read -concerning the building of King Solomon’s Temple, in -the Bible days.</p> - -<p>Not one of the Naztecs bothered them while they busied -themselves about the cave.</p> - -<p>There was an abundance of fuel for the furnaces in the -place, and before an hour had elapsed Dick and Leo had -kindled the fires.</p> - -<p>Meanwhile, Owens and Lacy had been busy in conveying -the copper ore to the place.</p> - -<p>Not until they had deposited all they thought they -needed in the cave did they discover an abundant supply -already there, of copper, silver and gold.</p> - -<p>The silver was more plentiful than any of the rest of -the ore and at the suggestion of Lacy, it was decided -to cast their cannon of four-fifths of copper and one-fifth -silver.</p> - -<p>Quite an expensive gun, the reader might say. But -of what use was the silver to our friends in that out-of-the-way -place? Even if they succeeded in defeating the -Hezzians and getting out of the underground place, it -would be impossible to carry much away with them.</p> - -<p>Anyhow, there was more than enough gold to load each -of the four down, and they made up their minds to take -all they could of this with them.</p> - -<p>Now that they had succeeded in obtaining the metal -and the means of melting it, the next thing was to manufacture -a mold.</p> - -<p>But Philander Owens considered this the easiest part -of it, and in less than half a day he had made one sufficient -to answer the purpose.</p> - -<p>He formed it by digging a hole in a bed of soft sand -of the depth required for the proposed cannon, and then -by running a round piece of wood of the size of the bore -they wanted down into this within a few inches of the -bottom, the mold was complete.</p> - -<p>Of course the touchhole would have to be drilled, and -the wood burned out afterward.</p> - -<p>When everything was in readiness, Dick and Leo held -the stick firmly in its place, and Lacy and Owens poured -in the molten mixture.</p> - -<p>There was a furious sizzling for a minute or so, and -then, when the steam caused by the intense heat coming -in contact with damp sand had cleared away, they saw -that, to all appearances, their cast had been successful.</p> - -<p>An examination told them that it was a success, and a -complete one, at that. They did not even have to burn -the stick out, for the wood, though being of the hardest -kind, had shrunk a trifle, which allowed them to pull it -out easily enough.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” exclaimed Leo, waving his cap in the air. -“Now, to bore out the touchhole and our cannon is completed!”</p> - -<p>As soon as it had cooled, they dug it out and rolled -it over upon the ground.</p> - -<p>While Lacy and Owens were engaged in boring out -the touchhole, the cousins melted up a number of bars -of gold into a shape convenient to take with them.</p> - -<p>It took the two men some time to make the required -hole, and, at length, when they had completed it, they had -been at least twelve hours in constructing their cannon.</p> - -<p>“Now,” observed Dick, “we must try it before we go -home.”</p> - -<p>The rest promptly agreed with him, and he proceeded -to load the huge weapon with a good charge of the -powder that had been manufactured by them.</p> - -<p>This was plentifully wadded and pounded in thoroughly, -and then they prepared to set it off.</p> - -<p>To avoid any possible accident, a slow-match was rigged<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> -and lighted, and then they repaired to a safe distance to -await the result.</p> - -<p>There was a fizzing noise, made by the slow-match, -and a few seconds later a terrific explosion rang out, -which shook the very ground upon which they stood.</p> - -<p>At the very instant it died out a rumbling sound was -heard, and the unknown light that illumined the strange -country went out as if by magic, leaving them in total -darkness!</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXI_THE_EARTHQUAKE_SHOCK">CHAPTER XXI.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">THE EARTHQUAKE SHOCK.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Two years had slipped by since the advent of the party -into the land of mystery, and at length the white men -left in Hez determined they would endeavor to find their -companions who had disappeared, and who, they believed, -were not far distant, but for some reason were -prevented from rejoining them.</p> - -<p>Prof. Easy, Haypole and Jones concluded to make an -effort to find a way to get below on a level with the -Devil’s Kingdom.</p> - -<p>They set out very early one morning, taking the passage -that led to the brink of the latter-named place.</p> - -<p>When they arrived there they began carefully studying -their surroundings, to find a means of descent.</p> - -<p>They had scarcely been there ten minutes when a low -rumble was heard, coming, it seemed, from beneath them.</p> - -<p>“An earthquake!” exclaimed the professor.</p> - -<p>The words had hardly left his lips when all three were -thrown upon the ground by a tremendous shock, which -lasted nearly half a minute.</p> - -<p>When they rose to their feet, a few moments later, in -a half-dazed condition, a startling sight met their gaze.</p> - -<p>The light, which had hitherto been quite bright, was -now very dim, and flashed forth in fitful bursts.</p> - -<p>But it was enough to enable them to see that a huge -pile of rocks had been scattered about, showing a clear -passage to the country below.</p> - -<p>“If there are no further shocks,” remarked the professor, -calmly, “this will prove a Godsend to us. It has -shown us what we have been <a id="Corr_30">looking for for so long</a>.”</p> - -<p>They waited for perhaps half an hour, and then, as they -experienced no further signs of another quake, they -started down the decline before them.</p> - -<p>Down they went, until they struck the level of the -stream that emerged from the Devil’s Kingdom.</p> - -<p>Once here, they had no difficulty in discovering footprints -made by somebody who had been there before -them.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” shouted the Yankee. “I knew I was right. -We’ll find Leo and Dick sure—see if we don’t! These -are the prints of the gal’s feet, who brought Leo here.”</p> - -<p>His companions were forced to admit that he was right, -and so they followed the trail along the bank of the -stream until the falls were reached, and then another descent -had to be made.</p> - -<p>There was nothing to hinder them from going down, -so they did so at once.</p> - -<p>Andrew Jones produced a torch, and was just about -to light it, when Haypole caught him by the arm in an -excited manner, and exclaimed:</p> - -<p>“Gosh-ding it, look there! It looks like a political -torchlight procession, don’t it?”</p> - -<p>He pointed to a spot on their left as he spoke.</p> - -<p>About three miles distant they plainly observed a band -of men, carrying torches, emerge from the mouth of a -cavernous passage.</p> - -<p>“I ain’t got a great deal of money with me, but I’ll be -ding-wizzened if I won’t bet fifty dollars that Leo is in -that gang!” said the Yankee, producing his pocketbook -in a matter-of-fact way.</p> - -<p>“I have not got any money, and if I had I would not -bet with you,” returned Jones. “I am of the same opinion -as you. Let us advance toward them; we can get near -enough to see just who and what they are without being -observed ourselves.”</p> - -<p>“Agreed!” exclaimed Prof. Easy; whereupon they set -out in the direction of the approaching torchlights.</p> - -<p>As they gradually neared them, they saw that there -were about thirty persons marching along, dragging some -heavy concern behind them, and carrying torches.</p> - -<p>“Do you know what I am a-goin’ ter do?” said Martin -Haypole, coming to a halt. “I am a-goin’ ter fire off -my revolver an’ prove that Leo Malvern is in that crowd.”</p> - -<p>In an instant he had drawn his revolver and fired a -shot.</p> - -<p>The echo of the report had scarcely died out when there -was an answering one from the approaching torch -bearers.</p> - -<p>“Great boots!” yelled the Yankee, jumping about three -feet in the air; “what did I tell you?”</p> - -<p>Then he opened wide his mouth and led his companions -in a deafening cheer.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXII_FREEDOM_AT_LAST">CHAPTER XXII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">FREEDOM AT LAST.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>Well satisfied that Leo was in the approaching party -of torch bearers, the professor and his two companions -hurried to meet them as fast as they could run.</p> - -<p>In less than five minutes the two parties met.</p> - -<p>A cry of joy went up from the three searchers.</p> - -<p>There were four men of their own race in the party of -torch bearers.</p> - -<p>A single glance told them this much, and they also -recognized all four.</p> - -<p>They were Leo Malvern, Dick Vincey, Reginald Lacy -and Philander Owens.</p> - -<p>Martin Haypole uttered a whoop, and, rushing forward, -seized the hands of the two brave, young fellows<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_31">[31]</a></span> -who had been his companions in their journey through -the Everglades to the end of mystery.</p> - -<p>“I’m downright glad to see you both alive an’ well!” -he exclaimed. “Where in thunderation have you been so -long, Dick?”</p> - -<p>“I can tell you the whole thing in a few words,” replied -Dick, as he shook hands with his former associates.</p> - -<p>Then he proceeded to relate what had befallen him -from the time he and the queen had disappeared from the -magic chamber.</p> - -<p>When he came to the point where their newly constructed -cannon was fired off, in order to test it, he said:</p> - -<p>“The report must have caused some disturbance among -the gases and electric fluids in the underground country, -for immediately afterward there came a terrible shock, -and everything was in darkness.</p> - -<p>“It seemed to be a veritable earthquake, and we were -thrown to the ground with such force that it was several -minutes before we regained our senses and rose to our -feet.</p> - -<p>“When we did so we knew that something awful had -happened, so we put for the city with all possible speed.</p> - -<p>“On arriving there, we discovered that it was but a -mass of ruins.</p> - -<p>“Every building in it was leveled to the ground, and all -the combustible substances in the place had taken fire -from the burning furnaces that had been in some of the -houses.</p> - -<p>“As the flames leaped upward it was a grand but terrible -sight, and we could but look upon it with a feeling of -awe.</p> - -<p>“But we were sickened at heart when we learned, a -few minutes later, that of all the inhabitants of the thriving -little city, only twenty-nine were left.</p> - -<p>“The others had all been crushed to death by the falling -buildings.</p> - -<p>“Among the victims of the terrible disaster, brought -about by the discharge of our gun, were our wives—I -mean Queen Olive, Azurma and two Naztec ladies, whom -Lacy and Owens were wedded to.</p> - -<p>“The survivors were terror-stricken, and begged us to -lead them from the spot at once to the land of the Hezzians, -and fearful that another shock might take place, -we placed our gun on an improvised drag and started, -knowing that we could do nothing further for those who -lay beneath the ruins of the city.</p> - -<p>“Full of sorrow, we turned the angle that hid our view -of the destroyed city, and journeyed through the chamber -of rock to the open.</p> - -<p>“Here everything was in darkness, but we had provided -ourselves with torches, and lighted them as we -emerged. Shortly after that we heard the shot you fired, -and Leo answered it. That is all there is of it, but it is -quite enough, I can tell you.”</p> - -<p>There were tears in Dick’s eyes as he related the events -that had so recently taken place, and, recognizing the situation, -the professor and his two companions did not -question him further.</p> - -<p>On the contrary, they related their experiences since -they had parted company, and then, seizing hold of the -ropes attached to the drag, they all started for Hez.</p> - -<p>Andrew Jones knew full well that the Hezzians would -not allow them to depart in peace from the underground -world, or he would never have sanctioned the movement -to drag the cannon along with them.</p> - -<p>He thought if the destructive powers of the weapon -was once proved to them, they would give in and allow -the party to depart.</p> - -<p>It was no easy matter to drag the heavy piece up the -steep hills they were forced to traverse, but there were -enough to do it, and so they managed it very well.</p> - -<p>On their way to Hez they observed that the earthquake, -or whatever it might be called, had caused many changes.</p> - -<p>But, luckily for them, their way was not blocked up, -and in due time they came in sight of the village.</p> - -<p>But what a wonderful change had been wrought here!</p> - -<p>The surface of the ground above had given way and -caved in, making the opening above the village of stone -huts more than four times its former size.</p> - -<p>The majority of the buildings were buried from sight -beneath tons of dirt, and not a sign of any of the Hezzians -could be seen.</p> - -<p>The earth had caved in in the form of a slant, and, -with a cry of joy, our friends began mounting this.</p> - -<p>When they reached the top crust of the earth once -more, a prayer of heartfelt thanks left the lips of one -and all.</p> - -<p>But the Naztecs could not be induced to follow them to -the outside.</p> - -<p>The light of day was so strange to them that they were -too frightened to proceed further.</p> - -<p>In vain did Dick and Leo coax them to come up; but -they only shook their heads, and at length turned their -steps in the direction of their former homes in the bowels -of the earth.</p> - -<p>The swamp explorers found themselves upon a comparatively -high piece of ground, which was surrounded -by the marsh lands that composed the greater portion of -the vast Everglades.</p> - -<p>It was the first time they had set eyes upon the huge -trees and tangled undergrowth of the outside world in -two whole years, and, dreary as their surroundings were, -they thought it the most beautiful sight they had ever -witnessed.</p> - -<p>Those who had reached the earth’s surface were Dick -Vincey, Leo Malvern, Prof. Remington Easy, Martin -Haypole, Andrew Jones, Reginald Lacy and Philander -Owens.</p> - -<p>The only one missing of those who had entered the -door in the obelisk, two years before, was Lucky, the -darky.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_32">[32]</a></span></p> - -<p>Leo and Dick thought of this at about the same time, -and were for going back to search for him.</p> - -<p>As they were arguing over the matter with their friends -they heard a whistle in the distance, and, on looking in -the direction it came from, discovered the darky approaching -them.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” yelled Lucky, as he observed them, “I’s so -glad I hab foun’ youse, Massa Leo and Massa Dick.”</p> - -<p>“How did you get out of the Land of Hez?” asked -Leo.</p> - -<p>“De roof done cave in a little while back an’ kill putty -nigh all de people. I run for de stairs dat we cum down -when we fust cum here, an’ went up them till I seed a -light. I got out easy enough, as de big gravestone had -fall down an’ broke in two. I was terribly scared—’deed -I was; an’ waited in de bushes till I heered youse a-talkin’. -Den I whistled an’ cum over here.”</p> - -<p>That was the explanation Lucky gave for his sudden -appearance, and it about covered the matter.</p> - - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> -<h2><a id="CHAPTER_XXIII_OUT_OF_THE_EVERGLADES">CHAPTER XXIII.<br /> -<span class="titlefont">OUT OF THE EVERGLADES.</span></a></h2> - - -<p>“Now, then,” observed Dick Vincey, “let us leave the -land of mystery forever! We have passed through many -strange things while in it, and many enjoyable days, as -well. Let us say farewell to the underground world and -our families, who are buried beneath the ruins of the -Naztec city and the village of Hez!”</p> - -<p>There were tears in the eyes of the young man as he -spoke, and, with their eyes turned to the cavern they -had emerged from, all hands uttered the one word:</p> - -<p>“Farewell!”</p> - -<p>Then they left the spot and started for the place where -the obelisk had been.</p> - -<p>The huge stone column lay upon the ground in a dozen -pieces, while the stairs leading into the earth’s bowels -were plainly visible.</p> - -<p>“Now,” said Leo, “to get out of the Everglades.”</p> - -<p>As they started over the ground in the direction they -first came, Dick suddenly missed Jupiter, the dog, for the -first time.</p> - -<p>When he came to think of it, he had not seen him -since they left the ruined city of the Naztecs.</p> - -<p>He spoke about it to his friends.</p> - -<p>“The poor animal must have been killed during the -earthquake, and his master was too much excited to notice -his absence,” said Leo.</p> - -<p>The attire worn by our friends was of the style of the -places they had lived in, and they looked curious enough -as they made their way through the swamp.</p> - -<p>When they came through the Everglades, they had -chipped the trees on the route they took, and as these -marks were still plainly visible they anticipated but little -difficulty in getting back to their boat, the <em>Maid of the -Marsh</em>, which was looked upon with so much disgust by -the Yankee.</p> - -<p>They found the boat half covered with mud, but otherwise -she was uninjured.</p> - -<p>It took them nearly a day to clean her and get her -ready for use once more, and when this job was finished -all hands felt better.</p> - -<p>A week or so later eight forlorn-appearing men might -have been seen camped upon the borders of Lake Okechobee.</p> - -<p>They were Dick Vincey, Leo Malvern, Prof. Remington -Easy, Martin Haypole, Andrew Jones, Philander -Owens, Reginald Lacy and the darky, Lucky.</p> - -<p>The long gowns they wore were torn and dirty, and -they looked more like a crowd of ragpickers than anything -else.</p> - -<p>But they would soon be in the limits of civilization -again, and they felt thankful for it.</p> - -<p>Their journey from the Land of Hez to their present -position had been a perilous one, indeed.</p> - -<p>But by perseverance and pluck they managed to elude -the quicksands of the great swamp, and escape from being -devoured by the ferocious alligators it contained.</p> - -<p>Two weeks more and they reached the home of Leo -Malvern.</p> - -<p>It is needless to state that the cousins were received with -pleasure.</p> - -<p>Their relatives had long given them up as dead, and -hence their joy at meeting them alive and well.</p> - -<p>The wonderful story of their adventures was taken as a -joke at first, but when all hands stoutly adhered to it, -the relatives of Dick and Leo were forced to believe it.</p> - -<p>“There are a few questions I would like ter ask some -of you fellows,” said Martin Haypole, a day or two after -their arrival at Leo’s home. “First—who built the obelisk -at the entrance of Hez? Second—was the legend of Hez -true, and was Roderique de Amilo as old as he claimed? -Third—was the pool and fountain in the dazzlingly -lighted cavern really the Fountain of Youth Ponce de -Leon was in search of? And, fourth—was it really the -discharge of the cannon that caused the earthquake that -wrought such a ruin upon the city of the Naztecs and -the Land of Hez?”</p> - -<p>As the Yankee asked these questions he knocked the -ashes from his pipe and glanced around at his hearers.</p> - -<p>“Your questions will never be answered in this world,” -replied the professor, gravely. “We can form our own -opinions—that is all.”</p> - -<p>And so it is. We have stated the incidents of our -story in a manner meant to be plain; now we will leave -the reader to answer Martin Haypole’s questions.</p> - -<p class="center">THE END.</p> - -<p>The next issue of <span class="smcap">Brave and Bold</span>, No. 128, will contain -“Stonia Stedman’s Triumph; or, A Young Mechanic’s -Trials.” This story relates the experiences that -befell a young workman, and shows how he eventually -triumphed over a clique of jealous fellow workers, at the -same time unearthing the schemes of a band of dangerous -moonshiners. Be sure and read Stonia’s gallant struggle -against great odds.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 447px;"> -<img src="images/i_069.jpg" width="447" height="650" alt="" /> -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<div class="boxit4"> - -<p class="center xxlargefont boldfont">BE A ROOTER</p> - -<hr class="full" /> - -<p class="center largefont boldfont"><em>Root For a Record in the National -Game and for Tip Top Prizes</em> -</p> - -<hr class="full" /> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 581px;"> -<img src="images/i_069a.jpg" width="581" height="480" alt="" /> -<div class="caption"><p class="center">TIP TOP’S NATIONAL BASE BALL CONTEST</p></div> -</div> - -<hr class="full" /> - -<p class="boldfont">Do You Want to Try for the Pennant?</p> - -<p class="boldfont">Do You Want a Fine Outfit for Your Team?</p> - -<p class="boldfont">Do You Want to Score High in the National Game?</p> - -<p class="center boldfont"><em>HERE IS YOUR CHANCE</em> -</p> - -<hr class="full" /> - -<p class="center xlargefont boldfont">Root for the Famous Tip Top Prizes and Pennant</p> - -<hr class="full" /> - -<p class="center boldfont xxlargefont">PLAY BALL -</p> - -<hr class="full" /> - -<p class="center boldfont"><em>Watch Every Number for Further Announcements</em></p> -</div> - -<p> </p> -<hr class="tb" /> -<p> </p> -<p> </p> - -<div class="chapter"></div><!--Page break for ePub--> - -<div class="transnote"> -<h2 id="TN_end" style="margin-top: 0em">Transcriber’s Note:</h2> - -<p>Based on the available evidence, the author for this book is most -likely Cornelius Shea.</p> - -This story originally appeared, very likely in a longer version, -as “Under the Everglades; or, Two Years in a Land of Mystery,” -<cite>Golden Hours</cite> issues 176 through 185, June 13, 1891 to -August 15, 1891, published by Norman L. Munro & Company. - -<p>Punctuation has been made consistent.</p> - -<p>Variations in spelling and hyphenation were retained as they appear in -the original publication, except that obvious typos have been -corrected.</p> - -<p>Changes have been made as follows:</p> - -<p>p. <a href="#Corr_22">22</a>: “hate as he darted” changed to “hate darted” (of hate darted)</p> - -p. <a href="#Corr_30">30</a>: “looking for so” changed to “looking for for so” (looking for for so) - -</div> - -<p> </p> -<p> </p> -<hr class="pg" /> -<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE WONDERFUL LAND OF HEZ***</p> -<p>******* This file should be named 50654-h.htm or 50654-h.zip *******</p> -<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> -<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/5/0/6/5/50654">http://www.gutenberg.org/5/0/6/5/50654</a></p> -<p> -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed.</p> - -<p>Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. -</p> - -<h2>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> -<br /> -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</h2> - -<p>To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license.</p> - -<h3>Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works</h3> - -<p>1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8.</p> - -<p>1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.</p> - -<p>1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others.</p> - -<p>1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States.</p> - -<p>1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:</p> - -<p>1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed:</p> - -<blockquote><p>This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United - States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost - no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use - it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with - this eBook or online - at <a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you'll have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this - ebook.</p></blockquote> - -<p>1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.</p> - -<p>1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work.</p> - -<p>1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.</p> - -<p>1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License.</p> - -<p>1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.</p> - -<p>1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.</p> - -<p>1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that</p> - -<ul> -<li>You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation."</li> - -<li>You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works.</li> - -<li>You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work.</li> - -<li>You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.</li> -</ul> - -<p>1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.</p> - -<p>1.F.</p> - -<p>1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment.</p> - -<p>1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE.</p> - -<p>1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem.</p> - -<p>1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.</p> - -<p>1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions.</p> - -<p>1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. </p> - -<h3>Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm</h3> - -<p>Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life.</p> - -<p>Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org.</p> - -<h3>Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation</h3> - -<p>The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.</p> - -<p>The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact</p> - -<p>For additional contact information:</p> - -<p> Dr. Gregory B. Newby<br /> - Chief Executive and Director<br /> - gbnewby@pglaf.org</p> - -<h3>Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation</h3> - -<p>Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS.</p> - -<p>The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit <a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/donate">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>.</p> - -<p>While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate.</p> - -<p>International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.</p> - -<p>Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate</p> - -<h3>Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.</h3> - -<p>Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support.</p> - -<p>Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition.</p> - -<p>Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org</p> - -<p>This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.</p> - -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/old/50654-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/50654-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 98f4a18..0000000 --- a/old/50654-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/50654-h/images/i_001a.jpg b/old/50654-h/images/i_001a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 538ad8e..0000000 --- a/old/50654-h/images/i_001a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/50654-h/images/i_069.jpg b/old/50654-h/images/i_069.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6d48490..0000000 --- a/old/50654-h/images/i_069.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/50654-h/images/i_069a.jpg b/old/50654-h/images/i_069a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d94ec0e..0000000 --- a/old/50654-h/images/i_069a.jpg +++ /dev/null |
